Fix snafu in aarch64 opcodes debugging statement.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
2571583a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
2571583a 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
2571583a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
387dd777
DP
831@kindex -plugin @var{name}
832@item -plugin @var{name}
833Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
834the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
835automatically added by the complier, when using link time
836optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
837wish.
838
839Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
840from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
841@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
842those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
843copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
844based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
845just copy in the newest one.
846
26278bb8
UD
847@kindex --push-state
848@cindex push state governing input file handling
849@item --push-state
850The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
851flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
852restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
853
854The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
855@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
856@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
857@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
858@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
859@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
860
861One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
862used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
863listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
864something as follows:
865
866@smallexample
867-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
868@end smallexample
869
870@kindex --pop-state
871@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 872@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
873Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
874flags governing input file handling.
875
a712da20
NC
876@kindex -q
877@kindex --emit-relocs
878@cindex retain relocations in final executable
879@item -q
880@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 881Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
882Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
883order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
884in larger executables.
885
dbab7a7b
NC
886This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
887
4f471f39
RS
888@kindex --force-dynamic
889@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
890@item --force-dynamic
891Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
892to VxWorks targets.
893
252b5132
RH
894@cindex partial link
895@cindex relocatable output
896@kindex -r
1049f94e 897@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 898@item -r
1049f94e 899@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 900Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 901turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
902linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
903magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
904@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 905@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
906If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
907linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
908constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
909
62bf86b4
HPN
910When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
911partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
912relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
913example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
914with input files in other formats at all.
915
252b5132
RH
916This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
917
918@kindex -R @var{file}
919@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
920@cindex symbol-only input
921@item -R @var{filename}
922@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
923Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
924relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
925to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
926programs. You may use this option more than once.
927
ff5dcc92 928For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 929followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 930the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
931
932@kindex -s
933@kindex --strip-all
934@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 935@item -s
252b5132
RH
936@itemx --strip-all
937Omit all symbol information from the output file.
938
939@kindex -S
940@kindex --strip-debug
941@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 942@item -S
252b5132
RH
943@itemx --strip-debug
944Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
945
a70f34c0
NC
946@kindex --strip-discarded
947@kindex --no-strip-discarded
948@item --strip-discarded
949@itemx --no-strip-discarded
950Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
951Enabled by default.
952
252b5132
RH
953@kindex -t
954@kindex --trace
955@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 956@item -t
252b5132 957@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 958Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
959
960@kindex -T @var{script}
961@kindex --script=@var{script}
962@cindex script files
963@item -T @var{scriptfile}
964@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
965Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 966@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 967@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
968output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
969the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
970specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
971options accumulate.
252b5132 972
14be8564
L
973@kindex -dT @var{script}
974@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
975@cindex script files
976@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
977@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
978Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
979
980This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
981processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
982command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
983@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
984behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
985command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
986the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
987@samp{gcc}).
988
252b5132
RH
989@kindex -u @var{symbol}
990@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
991@cindex undefined symbol
992@item -u @var{symbol}
993@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
994Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
995symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
996modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
997different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
998option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
999
0a618243
AB
1000If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1001into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1002undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1003instead.
1004
1005@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1006@cindex symbols, require defined
1007@cindex defined symbol
1008@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1009Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1010is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1011is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1012and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1013@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1014can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1015
252b5132
RH
1016@kindex -Ur
1017@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1019For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1020@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1021turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1022@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1023It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1024with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1025be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1026@samp{-r} for the others.
1027
c005eb9e
AB
1028@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1029@cindex orphan sections
1030@cindex sections, orphan
1031@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1032Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1033specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1034
1035@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1036
1037@table @code
1038@item place
1039Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1040the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1041@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1042
1043@item discard
1044All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1045@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1046
1047@item warn
1048The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1049issue a warning.
1050
1051@item error
1052The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1053@end table
1054
1055The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1056
577a0623
AM
1057@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1058@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1059Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1060@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1061missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1062specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1063multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1064input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1065in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1066
252b5132
RH
1067@kindex -v
1068@kindex -V
1069@kindex --version
1070@cindex version
1071@item -v
1072@itemx --version
1073@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1074Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1075lists the supported emulations.
1076
1077@kindex -x
1078@kindex --discard-all
1079@cindex deleting local symbols
1080@item -x
1081@itemx --discard-all
1082Delete all local symbols.
1083
1084@kindex -X
1085@kindex --discard-locals
1086@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1087@item -X
252b5132 1088@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1089Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1090system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1091or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1092
1093@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1094@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1095@cindex symbol tracing
1096@item -y @var{symbol}
1097@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1098Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1099option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1100to prepend an underscore.
1101
1102This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1103don't know where the reference is coming from.
1104
1105@kindex -Y @var{path}
1106@item -Y @var{path}
1107Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1108for Solaris compatibility.
1109
1110@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1111@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1112The recognized keywords are:
1113@table @samp
1114
1115@item combreloc
1116Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1117lookup caching possible.
1118
b8871f35
L
1119@item common
1120Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1121link.
1122
cd6d6c15 1123@item defs
560e09e9 1124Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1125shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1126
6aa29e7b
JJ
1127@item execstack
1128Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1129
b039ef04
L
1130@item global
1131This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1132the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1133of subsequently loaded libraries.
1134
cd6d6c15
NC
1135@item initfirst
1136This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1137It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1138before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1139the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1140the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1141objects.
1142
1143@item interpose
1144Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1145but the primary executable.
1146
5fa222e4
AM
1147@item lazy
1148When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1149dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1150the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1151Lazy binding is the default.
1152
cd6d6c15
NC
1153@item loadfltr
1154Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1155runtime.
1156
1157@item muldefs
1158Allows multiple definitions.
1159
1160@item nocombreloc
1161Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1162
b8871f35
L
1163@item nocommon
1164Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1165link.
1166
cd6d6c15 1167@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1168Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1169defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1170
1171@item nodefaultlib
1172Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1173ignore any default library search paths.
1174
1175@item nodelete
1176Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1177
1178@item nodlopen
1179Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1180
1181@item nodump
1182Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1183
6aa29e7b
JJ
1184@item noexecstack
1185Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1186
8dfef1bd
L
1187@item text
1188Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1189
1190@item notext
1191Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1192
1193@item textoff
1194Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1195
6aa29e7b
JJ
1196@item norelro
1197Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1198
cd6d6c15
NC
1199@item now
1200When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1201dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1202when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1203deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1204first called.
1205
1206@item origin
1207Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1208
6aa29e7b
JJ
1209@item relro
1210Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1211
24718e3b
L
1212@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1213Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1214
1215@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1216Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1217
04c3a755
NS
1218@item stack-size=@var{value}
1219Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1220Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1221@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1222
d258b828
IZ
1223@item bndplt
1224Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1225
889c2a67
L
1226@item noextern-protected-data
1227Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1228library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1229to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1230generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1231module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1232i386 and x86-64.
1233
954b63d4
AM
1234@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1235Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1236if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1237by symbol visibility or versioning. Not all targets support this
1238option.
1239
aec6b87e 1240@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
954b63d4
AM
1241Do not make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
1242object. Not all targets support this option. If neither
1243@option{-z nodynamic-undefined-weak} nor @option{-z dynamic-undefined-weak}
1244are given, a target may default to either option being in force, or
1245make some other selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic.
aec6b87e 1246
4c10bbaa
L
1247@item noreloc-overflow
1248Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1249relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1250overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1251
caa65211
L
1252@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1253@itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1254@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1255@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1256@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1257Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1258to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1259@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1260@option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1261@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1262@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1263@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1264Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1265
cd6d6c15
NC
1266@end table
1267
ece2d90e 1268Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1269
1270@kindex -(
1271@cindex groups of archives
1272@item -( @var{archives} -)
1273@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1274The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1275either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1276
1277The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1278references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1279the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1280archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1281object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1282would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1283they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1284resolved.
1285
1286Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1287it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1288more archives.
1289
69da35b5
NC
1290@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1291@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1292@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1293@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1294Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1295recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1296and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1297the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1298behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1299so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1300restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1301
4a43e768
AM
1302@kindex --as-needed
1303@kindex --no-as-needed
1304@item --as-needed
1305@itemx --no-as-needed
1306This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1307on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1308the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1309on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1310needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1311emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1312non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1313the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1314non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1315Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1316the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1317needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1318from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1319
e56f61be
L
1320@kindex --add-needed
1321@kindex --no-add-needed
1322@item --add-needed
1323@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1324These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1325their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1326options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1327and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1328
252b5132
RH
1329@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1330@item -assert @var{keyword}
1331This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1332
1333@kindex -Bdynamic
1334@kindex -dy
1335@kindex -call_shared
1336@item -Bdynamic
1337@itemx -dy
1338@itemx -call_shared
1339Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1340for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1341default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1342for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1343multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1344@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1345
a1ab1d2a
UD
1346@kindex -Bgroup
1347@item -Bgroup
1348Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1349section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1350object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1351@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1352only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1353
252b5132
RH
1354@kindex -Bstatic
1355@kindex -dn
1356@kindex -non_shared
1357@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1358@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1359@itemx -dn
1360@itemx -non_shared
1361@itemx -static
1362Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1363platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1364variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1365may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1366library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1367option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1368option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1369shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1370references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1371libraries.
252b5132
RH
1372
1373@kindex -Bsymbolic
1374@item -Bsymbolic
1375When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1376definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1377for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1378within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1379@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1380executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1381the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1382support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1383
40b36307
L
1384@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1385@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1386When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1387symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1388This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1389when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1390to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1391This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1392libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1393
55255dae
L
1394@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1395@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1396Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1397typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1398global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1399within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1400to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1401in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1402which support shared libraries.
1403
1404The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1405scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1406
40b36307
L
1407@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1408@item --dynamic-list-data
1409Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1410
1411@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1412@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1413Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1414is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1415
0b8a70d9
L
1416@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1417@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1418Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1419
252b5132
RH
1420@kindex --check-sections
1421@kindex --no-check-sections
1422@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1423@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1424Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1425been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1426perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1427suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1428allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1429restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1430Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1431force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1432option.
252b5132 1433
ddbb8a31
NC
1434@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1435@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1436@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1437@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1438This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1439by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1440command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1441output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1442input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1443specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1444follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1445behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1446
1447This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1448libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1449mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1450their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1451required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1452the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1453dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1454symbols.
1455
252b5132
RH
1456@cindex cross reference table
1457@kindex --cref
1458@item --cref
1459Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1460generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1461Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1462
1463The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1464easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1465sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1466symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1467definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1468where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1469symbol are listed.
252b5132 1470
4818e05f
AM
1471@cindex common allocation
1472@kindex --no-define-common
1473@item --no-define-common
1474This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1475The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1476@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1477
1478The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1479the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1480of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1481forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1482Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1483from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1484This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1485and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1486duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1487paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1488
252b5132 1489@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1490@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1491@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1492Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1493address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1494times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1495limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1496context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1497symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1498constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1499using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1500@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1501equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1502
1503@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1504@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1505@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1506@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1507@itemx --no-demangle
1508These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1509and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1510present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1511underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1512mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1513different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1514to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1515demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1516is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1517
1518@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1519@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1520@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1521@item -I@var{file}
1522@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1523Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1524generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1525linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1526doing.
1527
9b8b325a
RF
1528@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1529@item --no-dynamic-linker
1530When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1531linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1532executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1533entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1534
a70f34c0
NC
1535@kindex --embedded-relocs
1536@item --embedded-relocs
1537This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1538that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1539is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1540targets.
1541
7ce691ae 1542@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1543@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1544@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1545@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1546Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1547with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1548
252b5132
RH
1549@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1550@item --force-exe-suffix
1551Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1552
1553If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1554@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1555the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1556option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1557Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1558it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1559
1560@kindex --gc-sections
1561@kindex --no-gc-sections
1562@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1563@item --gc-sections
1564@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1565Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1566targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1567performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1568@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1569collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1570implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1571
d5465ba2
AM
1572@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1573examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1574symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1575command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1576referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1577libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1578referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1579the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1580relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1581
ac69cbc6 1582This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1583@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1584specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1585a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1586
c17d87de
NC
1587@kindex --print-gc-sections
1588@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1589@cindex garbage collection
1590@item --print-gc-sections
1591@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1592List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1593printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1594collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1595default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1596be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1597line.
1598
22185505 1599@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1600@cindex garbage collection
1601@item --gc-keep-exported
1602When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1603collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1604default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1605executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1606collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1607Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1608it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1609ELF format targets.
1610
30824704
RM
1611@kindex --print-output-format
1612@cindex output format
1613@item --print-output-format
1614Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1615other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1616in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1617
3604cb1f
TG
1618@kindex --print-memory-usage
1619@cindex memory usage
1620@item --print-memory-usage
1621Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1622the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1623quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1624headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1625parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1626
1627@smallexample
1628Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1629 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1630 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1631@end smallexample
1632
252b5132
RH
1633@cindex help
1634@cindex usage
1635@kindex --help
1636@item --help
1637Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1638
ea20a7da
CC
1639@kindex --target-help
1640@item --target-help
1641Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1642
2509a395
SL
1643@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1644@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1645Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1646@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1647
1648@cindex memory usage
1649@kindex --no-keep-memory
1650@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1651@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1652symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1653instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1654necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1655while linking a large executable.
1656
1657@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1658@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1659@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1660@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1661Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1662is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1663The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1664behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1665libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1666
aa713662
L
1667@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1668@kindex -z muldefs
1669@item --allow-multiple-definition
1670@itemx -z muldefs
1671Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1672report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1673first definition will be used.
1674
b79e8c78 1675@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1676@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1677@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1678@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1679Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1680This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1681determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1682shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1683how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1684
903249d7
NC
1685The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1686referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1687an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1688a shared library.
1689
1690The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1691libraries specified at link time are that:
1692
1693@itemize @bullet
1694@item
1695A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1696that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1697resolvable at load time.
1698@item
1699There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1700symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1701
1702The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1703select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1704architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1705appropriate memset function.
1706@end itemize
b79e8c78 1707
31941635
L
1708@kindex --no-undefined-version
1709@item --no-undefined-version
1710Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1711it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1712will be issued instead.
1713
3e3b46e5
PB
1714@kindex --default-symver
1715@item --default-symver
1716Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1717exported symbols.
1718
1719@kindex --default-imported-symver
1720@item --default-imported-symver
1721Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1722imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1723
252b5132
RH
1724@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1725@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1726Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1727files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1728been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1729This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1730errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1731have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1732inappropriate.
1733
fe7929ce
AM
1734@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1735@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1736Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1737library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1738
252b5132
RH
1739@kindex --no-whole-archive
1740@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1741Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1742archive files.
1743
1744@cindex output file after errors
1745@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1746@item --noinhibit-exec
1747Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1748Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1749errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1750when it issues any error whatsoever.
1751
0a9c1c8e
CD
1752@kindex -nostdlib
1753@item -nostdlib
1754Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1755command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1756(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1757
252b5132 1758@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1759@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1760@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1761@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1762file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1763@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1764object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1765object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1766should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1767usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1768name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1769list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1770command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1771this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1772@end ifclear
1773
76359541
TP
1774@kindex --out-implib
1775@item --out-implib @var{file}
1776Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1777the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1778library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1779may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1780behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1781step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1782the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1783
36af4a4e
JJ
1784@kindex -pie
1785@kindex --pic-executable
1786@item -pie
1787@itemx --pic-executable
1788@cindex position independent executables
1789Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1790ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1791libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1792address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1793normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1794defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1795
252b5132
RH
1796@kindex -qmagic
1797@item -qmagic
1798This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1799
1800@kindex -Qy
1801@item -Qy
1802This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1803
1804@kindex --relax
1805@cindex synthesizing linker
1806@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1807@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1808@item --relax
28d5f677 1809@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1810An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1811@ifset GENERIC
1812This option is only supported on a few targets.
1813@end ifset
1814@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1815@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1816@end ifset
1817@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1818@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1819@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1820@ifset XTENSA
1821@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1822@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1823@ifset M68HC11
1824@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1825@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1826@ifset NIOSII
1827@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1828@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1829@ifset POWERPC
1830@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1831@end ifset
252b5132 1832
28d5f677
NC
1833On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1834global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1835addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1836synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1837instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1838
1839On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1840debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1841@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1842This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1843family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1844@end ifset
1845
1846@ifset GENERIC
1847On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1848but ignored.
1849@end ifset
1850
28d5f677
NC
1851On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1852@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1853
252b5132
RH
1854@cindex retaining specified symbols
1855@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1856@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1857@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1858@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1859Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1860discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1861symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1862@ifset GENERIC
1863(such as VxWorks)
1864@end ifset
1865where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1866run-time memory.
1867
1868@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1869or symbols needed for relocations.
1870
1871You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1872line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1873
1874@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1875@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1876@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1877@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1878Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1879linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1880arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1881them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1882also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1883objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1884@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1885ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1886@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1887
ff5dcc92 1888The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1889SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1890@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1891runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1892options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1893gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1894file systems.
252b5132 1895
ff5dcc92 1896For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1897followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1898the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1899@end ifset
1900
1901@ifset GENERIC
1902@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1903@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1904@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1905When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1906happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1907of the input files.
1908
1909When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1910non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1911shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1912explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1913specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1914@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1915either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1916appearing multiple times.
1917
e680a6b6
NC
1918The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1919directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1920containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1921and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
192264-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1923
1924The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1925@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1926supported.
1927
28c309a2
NC
1928This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1929that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1930is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1931runtime linker would do.
1932
252b5132 1933The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1934libraries:
252b5132
RH
1935@enumerate
1936@item
ff5dcc92 1937Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1938@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1939Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1940between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1941specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1942used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1943at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1944by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1945the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1946@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1947On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1948@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1949environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1950@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1951On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1952directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1953@item
a1b8d843 1954For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1955variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1956@item
ec4eb78a
L
1957For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1958@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1959libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1960@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1961@item
252b5132
RH
1962The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1963@item
1964For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1965exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1966@end enumerate
1967
1968If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1969warning and continue with the link.
1970@end ifset
1971
1972@kindex -shared
1973@kindex -Bshareable
1974@item -shared
1975@itemx -Bshareable
1976@cindex shared libraries
1977Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1978and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1979shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1980undefined symbols in the link.
1981
252b5132 1982@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1983@item --sort-common
1984@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1985@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1986This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1987ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1988sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1989eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1990between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1991specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1992
2509a395
SL
1993@kindex --sort-section=name
1994@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1995This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1996patterns in the linker script.
1997
2509a395
SL
1998@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1999@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2000This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2001patterns in the linker script.
2002
a70f34c0
NC
2003@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2004@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2005This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2006.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2007post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2008
252b5132 2009@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2010@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2011Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2012each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2013size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2014
2015@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2016@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2017Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2018output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2019This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2020certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2021cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2022that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2023support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2024input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2025more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2026many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2027
2028@kindex --stats
2029@item --stats
2030Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2031as execution time and memory usage.
2032
2509a395 2033@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2034@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2035Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2036configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2037that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2038
a70f34c0
NC
2039@kindex --task-link
2040@item --task-link
2041This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2042file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2043
252b5132
RH
2044@kindex --traditional-format
2045@cindex traditional format
2046@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2047For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2048the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2049use the traditional format instead.
2050
2051@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2052For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2053symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2054full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2055@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2056trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2057combine duplicate entries.
2058
2509a395
SL
2059@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2060@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2061Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2062address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2063times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2064line.
2065@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2066for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2067@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2068should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2069sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2070
2509a395
SL
2071@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2072@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2073@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2074@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2075@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2076@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2077@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2078Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2079@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2080
2509a395
SL
2081@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2082@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2083@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2084When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2085byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2086
9d5777a3
RM
2087@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2088@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2089@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2090When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2091the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2092text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2093
0d705e9f
AM
2094@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2095@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2096@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2097When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2098model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2099
560e09e9
NC
2100@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2101@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2102Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2103values for @samp{method}:
2104
2105@table @samp
2106@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2107Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2108
2109@item report-all
da8bce14 2110Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2111
2112@item ignore-in-object-files
2113Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2114ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2115
2116@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2117Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2118ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2119when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2120libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2121command line.
2122@end table
2123
2124The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2125by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2126
2127Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2128unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2129can change this to a warning.
2130
1715a13c
L
2131@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2132@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2133@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2134@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2135Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2136supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2137the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2138argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2139
2140@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2141@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2142@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2143Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2144used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2145about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2146is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2147see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2148use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2149symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2150@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2151
7ce691ae 2152@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2153@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2154@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2155@item --warn-common
2156Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2157a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2158but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2159you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2160Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2161warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2162
2163There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2164
2165@table @samp
2166@item int i = 1;
2167A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2168file.
2169
2170@item extern int i;
2171An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2172There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2173variable somewhere.
2174
2175@item int i;
2176A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2177variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2178The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2179single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2180size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2181a definition of the same variable.
2182@end table
2183
2184The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2185Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2186just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2187encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2188a common symbol.
2189
2190@enumerate
2191@item
2192Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2193definition for the symbol.
2194@smallexample
2195@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2196 overridden by definition
2197@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2198@end smallexample
2199
2200@item
2201Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2202the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2203except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2204@smallexample
2205@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2206 overriding common
2207@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2208@end smallexample
2209
2210@item
2211Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2212@smallexample
2213@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2214 of `@var{symbol}'
2215@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2216@end smallexample
2217
2218@item
2219Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2220@smallexample
2221@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2222 overridden by larger common
2223@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2224@end smallexample
2225
2226@item
2227Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2228the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2229encountered in a different order.
2230@smallexample
2231@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2232 overriding smaller common
2233@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2234@end smallexample
2235@end enumerate
2236
2237@kindex --warn-constructors
2238@item --warn-constructors
2239Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2240object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2241detect the use of global constructors.
2242
2243@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2244@item --warn-multiple-gp
2245Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2246This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2247Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2248section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2249of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2250base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2251base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2252bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2253large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2254values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2255option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2256
2257@kindex --warn-once
2258@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2259@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2260@item --warn-once
2261Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2262which refers to it.
2263
2264@kindex --warn-section-align
2265@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2266@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2267@item --warn-section-align
2268Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2269alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2270The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2271is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2272the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2273
8fdd7217
NC
2274@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2275@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2276Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2277
a0c402a5
L
2278@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2279@item --warn-alternate-em
2280Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2281
560e09e9
NC
2282@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2283@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2284If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2285@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2286This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2287
2288@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2289@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2290This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2291it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2292
252b5132
RH
2293@kindex --whole-archive
2294@cindex including an entire archive
2295@item --whole-archive
2296For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2297@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2298in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2299files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2300library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2301library. This option may be used more than once.
2302
7ec229ce 2303Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2304about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2305Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2306list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2307your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2308
2509a395
SL
2309@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2310@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2311Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2312@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2313undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2314@var{symbol}.
2315
2316This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2317wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2318wishes to call the system function, it should call
2319@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2320
2321Here is a trivial example:
2322
2323@smallexample
2324void *
cc2f008e 2325__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2326@{
cc2f008e 2327 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2328 return __real_malloc (c);
2329@}
2330@end smallexample
2331
ff5dcc92 2332If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2333all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2334instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2335call the real @code{malloc} function.
2336
2337You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2338links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2339you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2340file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2341call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2342
6aa29e7b 2343@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2344@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2345@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2346@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2347Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2348(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2349section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2350
e41b3a13
JJ
2351@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2352@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2353Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2354generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2355if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2356
6c1439be
L
2357@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2358@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2359@item --enable-new-dtags
2360@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2361This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2362systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2363@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2364and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2365If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2366created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2367those options are only available for ELF systems.
2368
2d643429 2369@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2370@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2371Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2372close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2373time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2374increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2375value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2376
fdc90cb4
JJ
2377@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2378@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2379Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2380@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2381new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2382the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2383hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2384
0ce398f1
L
2385@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2386@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2387@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2388@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2389@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2390@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2391@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2392@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2393On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2394compressed using zlib.
2395
2396@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2397sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2398DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2399instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2400also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2401sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2402
2403The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2404@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2405
2406Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2407sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2408for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2409uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2410
2411The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2412involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2413default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2414@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2415
35835446
JR
2416@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2417@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2418This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2419linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2420for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2421about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2422
4f9c04f7 2423Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24241021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2425run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2426has been used.
2427
2428The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2429enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2430
c0065db7
RM
2431@kindex --build-id
2432@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2433@item --build-id
2434@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2435Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2436or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2437unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2438@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2439@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2440@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2441the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2442string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2443@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2444is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2445
2446The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2447that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2448unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2449to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2450file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2451string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2452
2453Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2454@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2455@end table
2456
0285c67d
NC
2457@c man end
2458
36f63dca 2459@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2460
0285c67d
NC
2461@c man begin OPTIONS
2462
ff5dcc92 2463The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2464the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2465normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2466use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2467@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2468like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2469symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2470object file).
2471
2472In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2473support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2474PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2475values by either a space or an equals sign.
2476
ff5dcc92 2477@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2478
2479@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2480@item --add-stdcall-alias
2481If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2482as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2483[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2484
2485@kindex --base-file
2486@item --base-file @var{file}
2487Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2488addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2489@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2490[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2491
2492@kindex --dll
2493@item --dll
2494Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2495@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2496file.
bb10df36 2497[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2498
88183869
DK
2499@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2500@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2501@item --enable-long-section-names
2502@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2503The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2504the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2505for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2506fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2507to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2508allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2509disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2510generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2511as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2512with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2513GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2514information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2515option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2516section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2517when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2518image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2519[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2520
252b5132
RH
2521@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2522@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2523@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2524@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2525If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2526do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2527only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2528resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2529undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2530@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2531to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2532warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2533import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2534to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2535feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2536@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2537mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2538[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2539
522f09cd
KT
2540@kindex --leading-underscore
2541@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2542@item --leading-underscore
2543@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2544For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2545in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2546disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2547
252b5132
RH
2548@cindex DLLs, creating
2549@kindex --export-all-symbols
2550@item --export-all-symbols
2551If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2552be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2553otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2554explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2555attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2556option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2557@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2558@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2559exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2560re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2561such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2562@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2563@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2564Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2565not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2566extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2567(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2568These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2569@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2570@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2571@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2572@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2573[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2574
2575@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2576@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2577Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2578exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2579[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2580
2927aaca
NC
2581@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2582@item --exclude-all-symbols
2583Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2584[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2585
252b5132
RH
2586@kindex --file-alignment
2587@item --file-alignment
2588Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2589file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2590512.
bb10df36 2591[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2592
2593@cindex heap size
2594@kindex --heap
2595@item --heap @var{reserve}
2596@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2597Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2598to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2599committed.
bb10df36 2600[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2601
2602@cindex image base
2603@kindex --image-base
2604@item --image-base @var{value}
2605Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2606the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2607is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2608your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2609other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2610for dlls.
bb10df36 2611[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2612
2613@kindex --kill-at
2614@item --kill-at
2615If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2616symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2617[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2618
26d2d8a2
BF
2619@kindex --large-address-aware
2620@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2621If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2622header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2623greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2624or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2625section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2626[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2627
f69a2f97
NC
2628@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2629@item --disable-large-address-aware
2630Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2631This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2632driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2633addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2634[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2635
252b5132
RH
2636@kindex --major-image-version
2637@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2638Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2639[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2640
2641@kindex --major-os-version
2642@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2643Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2644[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2645
2646@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2647@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2648Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2649[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2650
2651@kindex --minor-image-version
2652@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2653Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2654[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2655
2656@kindex --minor-os-version
2657@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2658Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2659[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2660
2661@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2662@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2663Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2664[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2665
2666@cindex DEF files, creating
2667@cindex DLLs, creating
2668@kindex --output-def
2669@item --output-def @var{file}
2670The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2671file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2672(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2673library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2674automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2675[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2676
b044cda1 2677@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2678@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2679@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2680@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2681Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2682@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2683By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2684for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2685execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2686[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2687
2688@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2689@item --disable-auto-image-base
2690Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2691user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2692default.
bb10df36 2693[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2694
2695@cindex DLLs, linking to
2696@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2697@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2698When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2699search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2700@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2701between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2702uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2703@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2704[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2705
2706@kindex --enable-auto-import
2707@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2708Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2709DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2710building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2711'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2712to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2713specification published by Microsoft.
2714
e2a83dd0
NC
2715Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2716data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2717placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2718around a problem with consts that is described here:
2719http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2720
4d8907ac
DS
2721Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2722see this message:
0d888aac 2723
ece2d90e 2724"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2725documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2726
ece2d90e
NC
2727This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2728ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2729allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2730fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2731constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2732multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2733this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2734of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2735the warning, and exit.
2736
2737There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2738data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2739
2fa9fc65
NC
2740One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2741of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2742this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2743
c0065db7
RM
2744A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2745that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2746there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2747a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2748
2749@example
2750extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2751extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2752 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2753@end example
2754
2755or
2756
2757@example
2758extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2759extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2760 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2761@end example
2762
c0065db7 2763For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2764is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2765
2766@example
2767extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2768extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2769 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2770@end example
2771
c406afaf
NC
2772or
2773
2774@example
2775extern long long extern_ll;
2776extern_ll -->
2777 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2778@end example
2779
2fa9fc65 2780A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2781'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2782@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2783requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2784building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2785merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2786between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2787constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2788
2789Original:
2790@example
2791--foo.h
2792extern int arr[];
2793--foo.c
2794#include "foo.h"
2795void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2796 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2797@}
2798@end example
2799
2800Solution 1:
2801@example
2802--foo.h
2803extern int arr[];
2804--foo.c
2805#include "foo.h"
2806void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2807 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2808 volatile int *parr = arr;
2809 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2810@}
2811@end example
2812
2813Solution 2:
2814@example
2815--foo.h
2816/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2817#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2818 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2819#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2820#else
2821#define FOO_IMPORT
2822#endif
2823extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2824--foo.c
2825#include "foo.h"
2826void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2827 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2828@}
2829@end example
2830
c0065db7 2831A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2832library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2833for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2834functions).
bb10df36 2835[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2836
2837@kindex --disable-auto-import
2838@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2839Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2840@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2841[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2842
2fa9fc65
NC
2843@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2844@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2845If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2846that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2847a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2848environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2849[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2850
2851@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2852@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2853Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2854DLLs.
bb10df36 2855[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2856
b044cda1
CW
2857@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2858@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2859Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2860[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2861
252b5132
RH
2862@kindex --section-alignment
2863@item --section-alignment
2864Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2865addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2866[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2867
2868@cindex stack size
2869@kindex --stack
2870@item --stack @var{reserve}
2871@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2872Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2873to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2874committed.
bb10df36 2875[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2876
2877@kindex --subsystem
2878@item --subsystem @var{which}
2879@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2880@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2881Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2882legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2883@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2884the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2885@var{which}.
bb10df36 2886[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2887
2f563b51
DK
2888The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2889of the PE file header:
2890[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2891
2d5c3743
NC
2892@kindex --high-entropy-va
2893@item --high-entropy-va
2894Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2895(ASLR).
2896
2f563b51
DK
2897@kindex --dynamicbase
2898@item --dynamicbase
2899The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2900randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2901Vista for i386 PE targets.
2902
2903@kindex --forceinteg
2904@item --forceinteg
2905Code integrity checks are enforced.
2906
2907@kindex --nxcompat
2908@item --nxcompat
2909The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2910This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2911
2912@kindex --no-isolation
2913@item --no-isolation
2914Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2915
2916@kindex --no-seh
2917@item --no-seh
2918The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2919this image.
2920
2921@kindex --no-bind
2922@item --no-bind
2923Do not bind this image.
2924
2925@kindex --wdmdriver
2926@item --wdmdriver
2927The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2928
2f563b51
DK
2929@kindex --tsaware
2930@item --tsaware
2931The image is Terminal Server aware.
2932
0cb112f7
CF
2933@kindex --insert-timestamp
2934@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2935@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2936Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2937as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2938other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2939will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2940same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2941can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2942that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2943identically.
252b5132
RH
2944@end table
2945
0285c67d
NC
2946@c man end
2947
ac145307
BS
2948@ifset C6X
2949@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2950
2951@c man begin OPTIONS
2952
2953The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2954libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2955all executables use an index of 0.
2956
2957@table @gcctabopt
2958
2959@kindex --dsbt-size
2960@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2961This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2962or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2963entries.
2964
2965@kindex --dsbt-index
2966@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2967This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2968to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2969executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2970@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2971
fbd9ad90
PB
2972@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2973The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2974exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2975
ac145307
BS
2976@end table
2977
2978@c man end
2979@end ifset
2980
93fd0973
SC
2981@ifset M68HC11
2982@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2983
2984@c man begin OPTIONS
2985
2986The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2987memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2988
2989@table @gcctabopt
2990
2991@kindex --no-trampoline
2992@item --no-trampoline
2993This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2994is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2995instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2996
2997@kindex --bank-window
2998@item --bank-window @var{name}
2999This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3000the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3001The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3002paging and addresses within the memory window.
3003
3004@end table
3005
3006@c man end
3007@end ifset
3008
7fb9f789
NC
3009@ifset M68K
3010@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3011
3012@c man begin OPTIONS
3013
3014The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3015when linking for 68K targets.
3016
3017@table @gcctabopt
3018
3019@kindex --got
3020@item --got=@var{type}
3021This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3022@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3023@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3024Info entry for @file{ld}.
3025
3026@end table
3027
3028@c man end
3029@end ifset
3030
833794fc
MR
3031@ifset MIPS
3032@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3033
3034@c man begin OPTIONS
3035
3036The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3037generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3038linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3039
3040@table @gcctabopt
3041
3042@kindex --insn32
3043@item --insn32
3044@kindex --no-insn32
3045@itemx --no-insn32
3046These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3047generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3048or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
304932-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3050used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3051possible.
3052
8b10b0b3
MR
3053@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3054@item --ignore-branch-isa
3055@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3056@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3057These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3058transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3059accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3060is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3061instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3062equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3063calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3064a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3065an error.
3066
833794fc
MR
3067@end table
3068
3069@c man end
3070@end ifset
3071
252b5132
RH
3072@ifset UsesEnvVars
3073@node Environment
3074@section Environment Variables
3075
0285c67d
NC
3076@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3077
560e09e9 3078You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3079@ifclear SingleFormat
3080@code{GNUTARGET},
3081@end ifclear
3082@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3083
36f63dca 3084@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3085@kindex GNUTARGET
3086@cindex default input format
3087@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3088use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3089of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3090@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3091of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3092attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3093this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3094there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3095object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3096BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3097in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3098@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3099
3100@kindex LDEMULATION
3101@cindex default emulation
3102@cindex emulation, default
3103@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3104@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3105behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3106available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3107the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3108variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3109linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3110
3111@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3112@cindex demangling, default
3113Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3114@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3115default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3116a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3117may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3118options.
3119
0285c67d
NC
3120@c man end
3121@end ifset
3122
252b5132
RH
3123@node Scripts
3124@chapter Linker Scripts
3125
3126@cindex scripts
3127@cindex linker scripts
3128@cindex command files
3129Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3130written in the linker command language.
3131
3132The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3133the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3134the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3135more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3136direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3137described below.
3138
3139The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3140yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3141linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3142to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3143such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3144
3145You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3146line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3147default linker script.
3148
3149You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3150to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3151Linker Scripts}.
3152
3153@menu
3154* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3155* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3156* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3157* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3158* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3159* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3160* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3161* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3162* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3163* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3164* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3165@end menu
3166
3167@node Basic Script Concepts
3168@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3169@cindex linker script concepts
3170We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3171describe the linker script language.
3172
3173The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3174file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3175@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3176The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3177purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3178among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3179section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3180in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3181
3182Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3183also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3184contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3185the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3186A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3187area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3188loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3189which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3190of debugging information.
3191
3192Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3193first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3194the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3195@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3196section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3197same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3198is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3199(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3200based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3201RAM address would be the VMA.
3202
3203You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3204program with the @samp{-h} option.
3205
3206Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3207@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3208has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3209information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3210will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3211static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3212referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3213
3214You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3215program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3216option.
3217
3218@node Script Format
3219@section Linker Script Format
3220@cindex linker script format
3221Linker scripts are text files.
3222
3223You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3224either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3225symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3226generally ignored.
3227
3228Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3229If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3230otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3231double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3232file name.
3233
3234You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3235@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3236to whitespace.
3237
3238@node Simple Example
3239@section Simple Linker Script Example
3240@cindex linker script example
3241@cindex example of linker script
3242Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3243
3244The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3245@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3246memory layout of the output file.
3247
3248The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3249describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3250code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3251@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3252Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3253your input files.
3254
3255For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
32560x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3257linker script which will do that:
3258@smallexample
3259SECTIONS
3260@{
3261 . = 0x10000;
3262 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3263 . = 0x8000000;
3264 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3265 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3266@}
3267@end smallexample
3268
3269You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3270followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3271descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3272
252b5132
RH
3273The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3274sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3275counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3276other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3277current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3278incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3279@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3280
3281The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3282required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3283after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3284which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3285wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3286means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3287
3288Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3289@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3290@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3291
3292The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3293the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3294at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3295output section, the value of the location counter will be
3296@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3297effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3298immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3299
3300The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3301alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3302example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3303sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3304may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3305sections.
3306
3307That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3308
3309@node Simple Commands
3310@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3311@cindex linker script simple commands
3312In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3313
3314@menu
3315* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3316* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3317@ifclear SingleFormat
3318* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3319@end ifclear
3320
4a93e180 3321* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3322* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3323@end menu
3324
3325@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3326@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3327@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3328@cindex start of execution
3329@cindex first instruction
3330@cindex entry point
3331The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3332point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3333entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3334@smallexample
3335ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3336@end smallexample
3337
3338There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3339entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3340stopping when one of them succeeds:
3341@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3342@item
252b5132 3343the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3344@item
252b5132 3345the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3346@item
3ab904c4
NC
3347the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3348targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3349check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3350@item
252b5132 3351the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3352@item
252b5132
RH
3353The address @code{0}.
3354@end itemize
3355
3356@node File Commands
36f63dca 3357@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3358@cindex linker script file commands
3359Several linker script commands deal with files.
3360
3361@table @code
3362@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3363@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3364@cindex including a linker script
3365Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3366be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3367with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
336810 levels deep.
3369
4006703d
NS
3370You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3371@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3372
252b5132
RH
3373@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3374@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3375@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3376@cindex input files in linker scripts
3377@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3378@cindex linker script input object files
3379The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3380in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3381
3382For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3383a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3384then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3385
3386In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3387script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3388
e3f2db7f
AO
3389In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3390with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3391located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3392for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3393open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3394linker will search through the archive library search path.
3395The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3396as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3397description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3398
ff5dcc92 3399If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3400name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3401@samp{-l}.
3402
3403When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3404files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3405script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3406
3407@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3408@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3409@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3410@cindex grouping input files
3411The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3412files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3413new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3414in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3415
b717d30e
JJ
3416@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3417@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3418@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3419This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3420commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3421as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3422with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3423when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3424@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3425and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3426setting afterwards.
3427
252b5132
RH
3428@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3429@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3430@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3431The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3432@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3433@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3434Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3435precedence.
3436
3437You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3438output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3439
3440@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3441@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3442@cindex library search path in linker script
3443@cindex archive search path in linker script
3444@cindex search path in linker script
3445The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3446@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3447@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3448on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3449are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3450the command line option are searched first.
3451
3452@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3453@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3454@cindex first input file
3455The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3456that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3457though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3458when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3459first file.
3460@end table
3461
3462@ifclear SingleFormat
3463@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3464@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3465A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3466
3467@table @code
3468@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3469@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3470@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3471@cindex output file format in linker script
3472The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3473output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3474exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3475(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3476line option takes precedence.
3477
3478You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3479formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3480This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3481desired endianness.
3482
3483If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3484will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3485output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3486used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3487
3488For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3489command:
3490@smallexample
3491OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3492@end smallexample
3493This says that the default format for the output file is
3494@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3495option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3496format.
3497
3498@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3499@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3500@cindex input file format in linker script
3501The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3502files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3503This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3504(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3505is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3506command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3507@end table
3508@end ifclear
3509
4a93e180
NC
3510@node REGION_ALIAS
3511@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3512@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3513@cindex region alias
3514@cindex region names
3515
3516Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3517@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3518
3519@smallexample
3520REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3521@end smallexample
3522
3523The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3524memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3525to memory regions. An example follows.
3526
3527Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3528memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3529that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3530non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3531access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3532read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3533sections:
3534
3535@itemize @bullet
3536@item
3537@code{.text} program code;
3538@item
3539@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3540@item
3541@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3542@item
3543@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3544@end itemize
3545
3546The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3547part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3548output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3549systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3550@code{C}:
3551@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3552@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3553@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3554@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3555@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3556@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3557@end multitable
3558The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3559loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3560the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3561the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3562
3563The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3564includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3565memory layout:
3566@smallexample
3567INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3568
3569SECTIONS
3570 @{
3571 .text :
3572 @{
3573 *(.text)
3574 @} > REGION_TEXT
3575 .rodata :
3576 @{
3577 *(.rodata)
3578 rodata_end = .;
3579 @} > REGION_RODATA
3580 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3581 @{
3582 data_start = .;
3583 *(.data)
3584 @} > REGION_DATA
3585 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3586 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3587 .bss :
3588 @{
3589 *(.bss)
3590 @} > REGION_BSS
3591 @}
3592@end smallexample
3593
3594Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3595regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3596variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3597@table @code
3598@item A
3599Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3600@smallexample
3601MEMORY
3602 @{
3603 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3604 @}
3605
3606REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3607REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3608REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3609REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3610@end smallexample
3611@item B
3612Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3613into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3614@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3615@smallexample
3616MEMORY
3617 @{
3618 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3619 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3620 @}
3621
3622REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3623REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3624REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3625REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3626@end smallexample
3627@item C
3628Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3629@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3630initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3631system start into the @code{RAM}.
3632@smallexample
3633MEMORY
3634 @{
3635 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3636 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3637 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3638 @}
3639
3640REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3641REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3642REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3643REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3644@end smallexample
3645@end table
3646
3647It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3648@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3649necessary:
3650@smallexample
3651#include <string.h>
3652
3653extern char data_start [];
3654extern char data_size [];
3655extern char data_load_start [];
3656
3657void copy_data(void)
3658@{
3659 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3660 @{
3661 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3662 @}
3663@}
3664@end smallexample
3665
252b5132 3666@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3667@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3668There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3669
3670@table @code
3671@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3672@kindex ASSERT
3673@cindex assertion in linker script
3674Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3675with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3676
fd1c4238
NC
3677Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3678take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3679inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3680for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3681symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3682
3683@smallexample
3684 .stack :
3685 @{
3686 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3687 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3688 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3689 @}
3690@end smallexample
3691
3692will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3693PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3694can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3695
3696@smallexample
3697 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3698 .stack :
3699 @{
3700 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3701 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3702 @}
3703@end smallexample
3704
3705will work.
3706
252b5132
RH
3707@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3708@kindex EXTERN
3709@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3710Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3711symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3712modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3713each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3714command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3715
3716@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3717@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3718@cindex common allocation in linker script
3719This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3720to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3721output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3722
4818e05f
AM
3723@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3724@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3725@cindex common allocation in linker script
3726This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3727command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3728to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3729
53d25da6
AM
3730@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3731@kindex INSERT
3732@cindex insert user script into default script
3733This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3734augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3735inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3736@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3737default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3738sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3739linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3740insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3741linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3742default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3743of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3744to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3745is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3746
3747@smallexample
3748SECTIONS
3749@{
3750 OVERLAY :
3751 @{
3752 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3753 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3754 @}
3755@}
3756INSERT AFTER .text;
3757@end smallexample
3758
252b5132
RH
3759@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3760@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3761@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3762This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3763references among certain output sections.
3764
3765In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3766using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3767will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3768errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3769a function defined in the other section.
3770
3771The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3772@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3773an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3774@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3775names.
3776
cdf96953
MF
3777@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3778@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3779@cindex cross references
3780This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3781references to one section from a list of other sections.
3782
3783The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3784output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3785a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3786there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3787must never call back.
3788
3789The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3790The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3791If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3792the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3793status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3794names, not input section names.
3795
252b5132
RH
3796@ifclear SingleFormat
3797@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3798@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3799@cindex machine architecture
3800@cindex architecture
3801Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3802of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3803architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3804the @samp{-f} option.
3805@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3806
3807@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3808@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3809This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3810@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3811in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3812@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3813@end table
3814
3815@node Assignments
3816@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3817@cindex assignment in scripts
3818@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3819@cindex variables, defining
3820You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3821the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3822
3823@menu
3824* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3825* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3826* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3827* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3828* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3829@end menu
3830
3831@node Simple Assignments
3832@subsection Simple Assignments
3833
3834You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3835
3836@table @code
3837@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3838@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3839@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3840@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3841@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3842@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3843@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3844@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3845@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3846@end table
3847
3848The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3849@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3850defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3851
3852The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3853may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3854
3855The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3856
3857Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3858
3859You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3860statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3861section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3862
3863The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3864expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3865
3866Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3867assignments may be used:
3868
3869@smallexample
3870floating_point = 0;
3871SECTIONS
3872@{
3873 .text :
3874 @{
3875 *(.text)
3876 _etext = .;
3877 @}
156e34dd 3878 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3879 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3880@}
3881@end smallexample
3882@noindent
3883In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3884zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3885the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3886defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3887upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3888
eb8476a6
MR
3889@node HIDDEN
3890@subsection HIDDEN
3891@cindex HIDDEN
3892For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3893exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3894
3895Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3896@code{HIDDEN}:
3897
3898@smallexample
3899HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3900SECTIONS
3901@{
3902 .text :
3903 @{
3904 *(.text)
3905 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3906 @}
3907 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3908 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3909@}
3910@end smallexample
3911@noindent
3912In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3913
252b5132
RH
3914@node PROVIDE
3915@subsection PROVIDE
3916@cindex PROVIDE
3917In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3918only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3919the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3920@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3921@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3922@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3923@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3924@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3925
3926Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3927@smallexample
3928SECTIONS
3929@{
3930 .text :
3931 @{
3932 *(.text)
3933 _etext = .;
3934 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3935 @}
3936@}
3937@end smallexample
3938
3939In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3940underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3941the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3942underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3943If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3944linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3945
7af8e998
L
3946@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3947@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3948@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3949Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3950hidden and won't be exported.
3951
73ae6183
NC
3952@node Source Code Reference
3953@subsection Source Code Reference
3954
3955Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3956intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3957a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3958symbol that does not have a value.
3959
3960Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3961transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3962stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3963prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3964mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3965of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3966variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3967linker script variable might be referred to as:
3968
3969@smallexample
3970 extern int foo;
3971@end smallexample
3972
3973But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3974
3975@smallexample
3976 _foo = 1000;
3977@end smallexample
3978
3979In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3980transformation has taken place.
3981
3982When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3983things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3984in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3985second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3986table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3987contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3988value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3989
3990@smallexample
3991 int foo = 1000;
3992@end smallexample
3993
10bf6894 3994creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3995holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3996number 1000 is initially stored.
3997
3998When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3999first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4000memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4001So:
4002
4003@smallexample
4004 foo = 1;
4005@end smallexample
4006
4007looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4008associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4009address. Whereas:
4010
4011@smallexample
4012 int * a = & foo;
4013@end smallexample
4014
10bf6894 4015looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4016and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4017the variable @samp{a}.
4018
4019Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4020the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4021an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4022
4023@smallexample
4024 foo = 1000;
4025@end smallexample
4026
4027creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4028the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4029address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4030linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4031access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4032
4033Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4034you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4035use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4036section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4037linker script contains these declarations:
4038
4039@smallexample
4040@group
4041 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4042 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4043 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4044@end group
4045@end smallexample
4046
4047Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4048
4049@smallexample
4050@group
4051 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4052
73ae6183
NC
4053 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4054@end group
4055@end smallexample
4056
4057Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4058Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4059arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4060
4061@smallexample
4062@group
4063 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4064
4065 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4066@end group
4067@end smallexample
4068
4069Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4070operators.
73ae6183 4071
252b5132 4072@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4073@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4074@kindex SECTIONS
4075The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4076into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4077
4078The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4079@smallexample
4080SECTIONS
4081@{
4082 @var{sections-command}
4083 @var{sections-command}
4084 @dots{}
4085@}
4086@end smallexample
4087
4088Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4089
4090@itemize @bullet
4091@item
4092an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4093@item
4094a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4095@item
4096an output section description
4097@item
4098an overlay description
4099@end itemize
4100
4101The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4102@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4103those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4104understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4105the layout of the output file.
4106
4107Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4108below.
4109
4110If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4111linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4112section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4113input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4114example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4115in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4116
4117@menu
4118* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4119* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4120* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4121* Input Section:: Input section description
4122* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4123* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4124* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4125* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4126* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4127@end menu
4128
4129@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4130@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4131The full description of an output section looks like this:
4132@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4133@group
7e7d5768 4134@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4135 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4136 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4137 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4138 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4139 @{
4140 @var{output-section-command}
4141 @var{output-section-command}
4142 @dots{}
abc9061b 4143 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4144@end group
4145@end smallexample
4146
4147Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4148
4149The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4150name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4151The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4152the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4153The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4154
4155Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4156
4157@itemize @bullet
4158@item
4159a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4160@item
4161an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4162@item
4163data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4164@item
4165a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4166@end itemize
4167
4168@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4169@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4170@cindex name, section
4171@cindex section name
4172The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4173meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4174support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4175must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4176example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4177output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4178names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4179quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4180characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4181commas must be quoted.
4182
4183The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4184Discarding}.
4185
4186@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4187@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4188@cindex address, section
4189@cindex section address
4190The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4191address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4192is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4193
4194If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4195section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4196to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4197alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4198contained within the output section.
4199
4200The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4201
4202@itemize @bullet
4203@item
4204If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4205is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4206in that region.
4207
4208@item
4209If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4210regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4211section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4212be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4213
4214@item
4215If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4216the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4217counter.
4218@end itemize
4219
4220@noindent
4221For example:
4222
252b5132
RH
4223@smallexample
4224.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4225@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4226
252b5132
RH
4227@noindent
4228and
ea5cae92 4229
252b5132
RH
4230@smallexample
4231.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4232@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4233
252b5132
RH
4234@noindent
4235are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4236@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4237counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4238counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4239input sections.
252b5132
RH
4240
4241The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4242For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4243so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4244do something like this:
4245@smallexample
4246.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4247@end smallexample
4248@noindent
4249This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4250aligned upward to the specified value.
4251
4252Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4253location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4254sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4255
4256@node Input Section
36f63dca 4257@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4258@cindex input sections
4259@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4260The most common output section command is an input section description.
4261
4262The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4263You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4264in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4265map the input files into your memory layout.
4266
4267@menu
4268* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4269* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4270* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4271* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4272* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4273@end menu
4274
4275@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4276@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4277@cindex input section basics
4278An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4279by a list of section names in parentheses.
4280
4281The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4282describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4283
4284The most common input section description is to include all input
4285sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4286include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4287@smallexample
4288*(.text)
4289@end smallexample
4290@noindent
18625d54 4291Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4292@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4293of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4294match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4295example:
252b5132 4296@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4297EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4298@end smallexample
4299@noindent
4300will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4301and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4302placed inside the section list, for example:
4303@smallexample
b4346c09 4304*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4305@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4306@noindent
4307The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4308two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4309more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4310
4311There are two ways to include more than one section:
4312@smallexample
4313*(.text .rdata)
4314*(.text) *(.rdata)
4315@end smallexample
4316@noindent
4317The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4318@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4319first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4320they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4321@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4322@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4323
8f1732fc
AB
4324When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4325is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4326immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4327@smallexample
4328*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4329@end smallexample
4330@noindent
4331will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4332@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4333from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4334exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4335could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4336@smallexample
4337*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4338@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4339@noindent
4340Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4341before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4342all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4343@smallexample
4344EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4345@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4346
252b5132
RH
4347You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4348You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4349needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4350@smallexample
4351data.o(.data)
4352@end smallexample
4353
ae17ab41
CM
4354To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4355of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4356
4357Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4358
4359@smallexample
4360@group
4361SECTIONS @{
4362 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4363 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4364@}
4365@end group
4366@end smallexample
4367
4368In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4369input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4370@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4371@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4372whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4373
967928e9
AM
4374You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4375matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4376with no whitespace around the colon.
4377
4378@table @samp
4379@item archive:file
4380matches file within archive
4381@item archive:
4382matches the whole archive
4383@item :file
4384matches file but not one in an archive
4385@end table
4386
4387Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4388wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4389single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4390@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4391within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4392also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4393other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4394from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4395command.
4396
252b5132
RH
4397If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4398the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4399commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4400@smallexample
4401data.o
4402@end smallexample
4403
967928e9
AM
4404When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4405and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4406characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4407name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4408did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4409though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4410@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4411the archive search path.
4412
4413@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4414@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4415@cindex input section wildcards
4416@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4417@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4418@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4419In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4420name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4421
4422The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4423pattern for the file name.
4424
4425The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4426
4427@table @samp
4428@item *
4429matches any number of characters
4430@item ?
4431matches any single character
4432@item [@var{chars}]
4433matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4434character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4435@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4436@item \
4437quotes the following character
4438@end table
4439
4440When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4441will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4442Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4443exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4444@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4445a @samp{/} character.
4446
4447File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4448specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4449does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4450
4451If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4452appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4453will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4454sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4455@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4456@smallexample
4457.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4458.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4459@end smallexample
4460
bcaa7b3e 4461@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4462Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4463in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4464this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4465pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4466@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4467into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4468
bcaa7b3e
L
4469@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4470@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4471difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4472descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4473Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4474reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4475
02ecc8e9
L
4476@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4477@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4478difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4479ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4480encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4481
bcaa7b3e
L
4482@cindex SORT
4483@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4484
4485When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4486can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4487
4488@enumerate
4489@item
4490@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4491It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4492sections have the same name.
4493@item
4494@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4495It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4496sections have the same alignment.
4497@item
c0065db7 4498@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4499treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4500@item
4501@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4502is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4503@item
4504All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4505@end enumerate
4506
4507When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4508section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4509takes precedence over the command line option.
4510
4511If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4512command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4513treated as nested sorting command.
4514
4515@enumerate
4516@item
4517@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4518@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4519@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4520@item
4521@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4522@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4523@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4524@end enumerate
4525
4526If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4527command line option will be ignored.
4528
eda680f8
L
4529@cindex SORT_NONE
4530@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4531section sorting option.
4532
252b5132
RH
4533If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4534@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4535precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4536
4537This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4538files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4539sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4540The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4541with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4542linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4543@smallexample
4544@group
4545SECTIONS @{
4546 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4547 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4548 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4549 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4550@}
4551@end group
4552@end smallexample
4553
4554@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4555@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4556@cindex common symbol placement
4557@cindex uninitialized data placement
4558A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4559file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4560linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4561named @samp{COMMON}.
4562
4563You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4564other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4565particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4566input files are placed in another section.
4567
4568In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4569@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4570@smallexample
4571.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4572@end smallexample
4573
4574@cindex scommon section
4575@cindex small common symbols
4576Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4577example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4578symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4579different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4580the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4581symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4582to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4583locations.
4584
4585@cindex [COMMON]
4586You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4587notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4588@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4589
4590@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4591@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4592@cindex KEEP
4593@cindex garbage collection
4594When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4595it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4596This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4597with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4598@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4599
4600@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4601@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4602The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4603to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4604start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4605@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4606follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4607@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4608@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4609All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4610files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4611
4612@smallexample
4613@group
4614SECTIONS @{
4615 outputa 0x10000 :
4616 @{
4617 all.o
4618 foo.o (.input1)
4619 @}
36f63dca
NC
4620@end group
4621@group
252b5132
RH
4622 outputb :
4623 @{
4624 foo.o (.input2)
4625 foo1.o (.input1)
4626 @}
36f63dca
NC
4627@end group
4628@group
252b5132
RH
4629 outputc :
4630 @{
4631 *(.input1)
4632 *(.input2)
4633 @}
4634@}
4635@end group
a1ab1d2a 4636@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4637
4638@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4639@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4640@cindex data
4641@cindex section data
4642@cindex output section data
4643@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4644@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4645@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4646@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4647@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4648You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4649@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4650an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4651parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4652value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4653counter.
4654
4655The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4656store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4657bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4658stored.
4659
4660For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4661of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4662@smallexample
4663BYTE(1)
4664LONG(addr)
4665@end smallexample
4666
4667When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4668same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4669target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4670@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4671@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4672
4673If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4674which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4675When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4676true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4677endianness of the first input object file.
4678
36f63dca 4679Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4680between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4681@smallexample
4682SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4683@end smallexample
4684whereas this will work:
4685@smallexample
4686SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4687@end smallexample
4688
252b5132
RH
4689@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4690@cindex holes, filling
4691@cindex unspecified memory
4692You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4693current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4694otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4695gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4696with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4697necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4698point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4699than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4700different parts of an output section.
4701
4702This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4703value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4704@smallexample
563e308f 4705FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4706@end smallexample
4707
4708The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4709section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4710part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4711entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4712precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4713expression.
252b5132
RH
4714
4715@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4716@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4717There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4718commands.
4719
4720@table @code
4721@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4722@cindex input filename symbols
4723@cindex filename symbols
4724@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4725The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4726The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4727file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4728the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4729
4730This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4731normally used for any other object file format.
4732
4733@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4734@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4735@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4736@item CONSTRUCTORS
4737When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4738unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4739destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4740arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4741automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4742For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4743linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4744@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4745ignored for other object file formats.
4746
4747The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4748constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4749Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4750the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4751first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4752of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4753compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4754formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4755@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4756the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4757destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4758@code{exit}.
4759
4760For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4761arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4762addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4763and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4764linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4765runtime code expects to see.
4766
4767@smallexample
4768 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4769 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4770 *(.ctors)
4771 LONG(0)
4772 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4773 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4774 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4775 *(.dtors)
4776 LONG(0)
4777 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4778@end smallexample
4779
4780If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4781which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4782are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4783are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4784command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4785@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4786@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4787@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4788
4789Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4790and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4791need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4792scripts.
4793
4794@end table
4795
4796@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4797@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4798@cindex discarding sections
4799@cindex sections, discarding
4800@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4801The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4802This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4803may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4804@smallexample
49c13adb 4805.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4806@end smallexample
4807@noindent
4808will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4809@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4810sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4811space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4812too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4813space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4814@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4815@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4816This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4817
a0976ea4 4818The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4819on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4820symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4821the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4822section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4823
4824@cindex /DISCARD/
4825The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4826input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4827section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4828
4829@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4830@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4831@cindex output section attributes
4832We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4833like this:
0c71d759 4834
252b5132 4835@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4836@group
7e7d5768 4837@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4838 [AT(@var{lma})]
4839 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4840 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4841 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4842 @{
4843 @var{output-section-command}
4844 @var{output-section-command}
4845 @dots{}
562d3460 4846 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4847@end group
4848@end smallexample
0c71d759 4849
252b5132
RH
4850We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4851@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4852remaining section attributes.
4853
a1ab1d2a 4854@menu
252b5132
RH
4855* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4856* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4857* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4858* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4859* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4860* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4861* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4862* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4863@end menu
4864
4865@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4866@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4867Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4868parentheses. The following types are defined:
4869
4870@table @code
4871@item NOLOAD
4872The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4873loaded into memory when the program is run.
4874@item DSECT
4875@itemx COPY
4876@itemx INFO
4877@itemx OVERLAY
4878These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4879rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4880marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4881section when the program is run.
4882@end table
4883
4884@kindex NOLOAD
4885@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4886@cindex loading, preventing
4887The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4888the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4889the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4890@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4891need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4892@smallexample
4893@group
4894SECTIONS @{
4895 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4896 @dots{}
4897@}
4898@end group
4899@end smallexample
4900
4901@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4902@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4903@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4904@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4905@cindex load address
4906@cindex section load address
4907Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4908@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4909@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4910specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4911address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4912
ea5cae92
NC
4913The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4914specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4915takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4916load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4917region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4918
4919If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4920section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4921load address:
4922
4923@itemize @bullet
4924@item
4925If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4926the LMA address as well.
4927
4928@item
4929If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4930
4931@item
4932Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4933with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4934section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4935VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4936the last section in the located region.
4937
4938@item
4939If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4940that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4941
4942@item
4943If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4944section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4945@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4946
4947@cindex ROM initialized data
4948@cindex initialized data in ROM
4949This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4950example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4951called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4952@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4953even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4954uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4955defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4956counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4957
4958@smallexample
4959@group
4960SECTIONS
4961 @{
4962 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4963 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4964 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4965 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4966 .bss 0x3000 :
4967 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4968@}
4969@end group
4970@end smallexample
4971
4972The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4973this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4974the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4975how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4976script.
4977
4978@smallexample
4979@group
4980extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4981char *src = &_etext;
4982char *dst = &_data;
4983
ea5cae92
NC
4984/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4985while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4986 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4987
ea5cae92 4988/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4989for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4990 *dst = 0;
4991@end group
4992@end smallexample
4993
bbf115d3
L
4994@node Forced Output Alignment
4995@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4996@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4997@cindex forcing output section alignment
4998@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4999You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5000alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5001intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5002
7e7d5768
AM
5003@node Forced Input Alignment
5004@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5005@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5006@cindex forcing input section alignment
5007@cindex input section alignment
5008You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5009SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5010sections, whether larger or smaller.
5011
0c71d759
NC
5012@node Output Section Constraint
5013@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5014@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5015@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5016@cindex constraints on output sections
5017You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5018of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5019read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5020@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5021
252b5132 5022@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5023@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5024@kindex >@var{region}
5025@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5026@cindex memory regions and sections
5027You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5028using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5029
5030Here is a simple example:
5031@smallexample
5032@group
5033MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5034SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5035@end group
5036@end smallexample
5037
5038@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5039@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5040@kindex :@var{phdr}
5041@cindex section, assigning to program header
5042@cindex program headers and sections
5043You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5044using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5045one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5046assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5047@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5048linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5049
5050Here is a simple example:
5051@smallexample
5052@group
5053PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5054SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5055@end group
5056@end smallexample
5057
5058@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5059@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5060@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5061@cindex section fill pattern
5062@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5063You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5064@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5065(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5066within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5067alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5068necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5069of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5070an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5071fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5072other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5073pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5074expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5075
5076You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5077output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5078
5079Here is a simple example:
5080@smallexample
5081@group
563e308f 5082SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5083@end group
5084@end smallexample
5085
5086@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5087@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5088@kindex OVERLAY
5089@cindex overlays
5090An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5091are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5092the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5093copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5094required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5095can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5096than another.
5097
5098Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5099@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5100output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5101command is as follows:
5102@smallexample
5103@group
5104OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5105 @{
5106 @var{secname1}
5107 @{
5108 @var{output-section-command}
5109 @var{output-section-command}
5110 @dots{}
5111 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5112 @var{secname2}
5113 @{
5114 @var{output-section-command}
5115 @var{output-section-command}
5116 @dots{}
5117 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5118 @dots{}
abc9061b 5119 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5120@end group
5121@end smallexample
5122
5123Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5124section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5125section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5126those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5127except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5128sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5129
abc9061b
CC
5130The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5131the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5132
252b5132
RH
5133The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5134addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5135memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5136whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5137and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5138and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5139
56dd11f0
NC
5140If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5141references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5142the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5143sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5144@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5145
5146For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5147provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5148defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5149@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5150the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5151within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5152symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5153
5154At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5155the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5156
5157Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5158@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5159@smallexample
5160@group
5161 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5162 @{
5163 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5164 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5165 @}
5166@end group
5167@end smallexample
5168@noindent
5169This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5170address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5171@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5172following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5173@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5174@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5175
5176C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5177like the following.
5178
5179@smallexample
5180@group
5181 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5182 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5183 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5184@end group
5185@end smallexample
5186
5187Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5188everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5189example could have been written identically as follows.
5190
5191@smallexample
5192@group
5193 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5194 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5195 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5196 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5197 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5198 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5199 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5200@end group
5201@end smallexample
5202
5203@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5204@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5205@kindex MEMORY
5206@cindex memory regions
5207@cindex regions of memory
5208@cindex allocating memory
5209@cindex discontinuous memory
5210The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5211memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5212
5213The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5214memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5215may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5216can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5217set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5218regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5219around to fit into the available regions.
5220
127fcdff
AB
5221A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5222however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5223specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5224@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5225@smallexample
5226@group
a1ab1d2a 5227MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5228 @{
5229 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5230 @dots{}
5231 @}
5232@end group
5233@end smallexample
5234
5235The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5236region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5237Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5238with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5239must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5240add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5241command.
252b5132
RH
5242
5243@cindex memory region attributes
5244The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5245whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5246not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5247@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5248section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5249the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5250them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5251
5252The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5253@table @samp
5254@item R
5255Read-only section
5256@item W
5257Read/write section
5258@item X
5259Executable section
5260@item A
5261Allocatable section
5262@item I
5263Initialized section
5264@item L
5265Same as @samp{I}
5266@item !
c09e9a8c 5267Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5268@end table
5269
5270If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5271@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5272attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5273in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5274attributes.
5275
5276@kindex ORIGIN =
5277@kindex o =
5278@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5279The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5280the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5281cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5282abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5283@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5284
5285@kindex LENGTH =
5286@kindex len =
5287@kindex l =
5288The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5289region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5290be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5291@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5292
5293In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5294available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5295and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5296linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5297is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5298or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5299explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5300region.
5301
5302@smallexample
5303@group
a1ab1d2a 5304MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5305 @{
5306 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5307 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5308 @}
5309@end group
5310@end smallexample
5311
5312Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5313specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5314@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5315a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5316output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5317was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5318the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5319output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5320region, the linker will issue an error message.
5321
3ec57632 5322It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5323expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5324@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5325
5326@smallexample
5327@group
c0065db7 5328 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5329@end group
5330@end smallexample
5331
252b5132
RH
5332@node PHDRS
5333@section PHDRS Command
5334@kindex PHDRS
5335@cindex program headers
5336@cindex ELF program headers
5337@cindex program segments
5338@cindex segments, ELF
5339The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5340@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5341loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5342program with the @samp{-p} option.
5343
5344When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5345reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5346program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5347This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5348interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5349
5350The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5351in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5352precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5353the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5354not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5355
5356The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5357generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5358ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5359
5360This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5361@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5362
5363@smallexample
5364@group
5365PHDRS
5366@{
5367 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5368 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5369@}
5370@end group
5371@end smallexample
5372
5373The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5374of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5375header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5376with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5377must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5378is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5379
5380Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5381system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5382specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5383sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5384attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5385Section Phdr}.
5386
5387It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5388merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5389repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5390contain the section.
5391
5392If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5393then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5394not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5395convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5396placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5397default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5398segment at all.
5399
5400@kindex FILEHDR
5401@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5402You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5403the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5404The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5405file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5406include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5407segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5408these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5409
5410The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5411value of the keyword.
5412
5413@table @asis
5414@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5415Indicates an unused program header.
5416
5417@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5418Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5419the file.
5420
5421@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5422Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5423
5424@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5425Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5426found.
5427
5428@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5429Indicates a segment holding note information.
5430
5431@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5432A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5433ABI.
5434
5435@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5436Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5437
1a9ccd70
NC
5438@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5439Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5440
252b5132
RH
5441@item @var{expression}
5442An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5443be used for types not defined above.
5444@end table
5445
5446You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5447in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5448@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5449Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5450output section attribute.
5451
5452The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5453which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5454explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5455an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5456header.
5457
5458Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5459headers used on a native ELF system.
5460
5461@example
5462@group
5463PHDRS
5464@{
5465 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5466 interp PT_INTERP ;
5467 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5468 data PT_LOAD ;
5469 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5470@}
5471
5472SECTIONS
5473@{
5474 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5475 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5476 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5477 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5478 @dots{}
5479 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5480 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5481 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5482 @dots{}
5483@}
5484@end group
5485@end example
5486
5487@node VERSION
5488@section VERSION Command
5489@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5490@cindex symbol versions
5491@cindex version script
5492@cindex versions of symbols
5493The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5494only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5495symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5496a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5497shared library.
5498
5499You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5500you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5501also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5502
5503The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5504@smallexample
5505VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5506@end smallexample
5507
5508The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5509Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5510version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5511version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5512version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5513scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5514library.
5515
5516The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5517examples.
5518
5519@smallexample
5520VERS_1.1 @{
5521 global:
5522 foo1;
5523 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5524 old*;
5525 original*;
5526 new*;
252b5132
RH
5527@};
5528
5529VERS_1.2 @{
5530 foo2;
5531@} VERS_1.1;
5532
5533VERS_2.0 @{
5534 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5535 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5536 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5537 "f(int, double)";
5538 @};
252b5132
RH
5539@} VERS_1.2;
5540@end smallexample
5541
5542This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5543version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5544The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5545a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5546of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5547symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5548is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5549in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5550However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5551name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5552
5553Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5554depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5555to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5556
5557Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5558depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5559and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5560
5561When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5562specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5563unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5564unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5565somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5566wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5567wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5568set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5569ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5570
5571The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5572they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5573could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5574However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5575
0f6bf451 5576Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5577in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5578symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5579won't.
5580
5581@smallexample
7c9c73be 5582@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5583@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5584
252b5132
RH
5585When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5586symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5587requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5588shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5589loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5590linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5591application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5592way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5593all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5594search for each symbol reference.
5595
5596The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5597doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5598that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5599functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5600the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5601required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5602that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5603versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5604the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5605
5606There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5607first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5608source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5609script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5610maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5611@smallexample
5612__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5613@end smallexample
5614@noindent
5615in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5616be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5617The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5618@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5619takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5620
5621The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5622function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5623an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5624version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5625linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5626
5627To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5628source file. Here is an example:
5629
5630@smallexample
5631__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5632__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5633__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5634__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5635@end smallexample
5636
5637In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5638unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5639example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5640@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5641
5642When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5643some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5644this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5645@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5646declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5647you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5648
5649If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5650within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5651(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5652specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5653
cb840a31
L
5654You can also specify the language in the version script:
5655
5656@smallexample
5657VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5658@end smallexample
5659
c0065db7 5660The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5661The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5662demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5663patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5664@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5665
86043bbb
MM
5666Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5667described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5668or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5669the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5670whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5671cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5672might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5673should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5674expect when you upgrade.
5675
252b5132
RH
5676@node Expressions
5677@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5678@cindex expressions
5679@cindex arithmetic
5680The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5681that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5682expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5683host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5684
5685You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5686
5687The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5688expressions.
5689
5690@menu
5691* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5692* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5693* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5694* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5695* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5696* Operators:: Operators
5697* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5698* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5699* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5700@end menu
5701
5702@node Constants
5703@subsection Constants
5704@cindex integer notation
5705@cindex constants in linker scripts
5706All constants are integers.
5707
5708As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5709octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5710hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5711@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5712@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5713value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5714
5715@cindex scaled integers
5716@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5717@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5718@cindex suffixes for integers
5719@cindex integer suffixes
5720In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5721constant by
5722@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5723@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5724@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5725@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5726@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5727@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5728@tex
5729${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5730@end tex
5731@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5732respectively. For example, the following
5733all refer to the same quantity:
5734
252b5132 5735@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5736_fourk_1 = 4K;
5737_fourk_2 = 4096;
5738_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5739_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5740@end smallexample
5741
8a308ae8
NC
5742Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5743conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5744
0c71d759
NC
5745@node Symbolic Constants
5746@subsection Symbolic Constants
5747@cindex symbolic constants
5748@kindex CONSTANT
5749It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5750the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5751
5752@table @code
5753@item MAXPAGESIZE
5754@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5755The target's maximum page size.
5756
5757@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5758@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5759The target's default page size.
5760@end table
5761
5762So for example:
5763
5764@smallexample
9d5777a3 5765 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5766@end smallexample
5767
5768will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5769supported by the target.
5770
252b5132
RH
5771@node Symbols
5772@subsection Symbol Names
5773@cindex symbol names
5774@cindex names
5775@cindex quoted symbol names
5776@kindex "
5777Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5778and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5779Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5780specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5781keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5782@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5783"SECTION" = 9;
5784"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5785@end smallexample
5786
5787Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5788to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5789whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5790
ecca9871
L
5791@node Orphan Sections
5792@subsection Orphan Sections
5793@cindex orphan
5794Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5795are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5796script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5797output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5798in which to place the orphaned input section.
5799
5800If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5801an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5802placed at the end of that output section.
5803
5804If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5805sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5806name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5807orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5808one new output section.
5809
5810If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5811then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5812in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5813linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5814attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5815sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5816support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5817
c005eb9e
AB
5818The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5819(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5820output sections an orphan is placed in.
5821
41911f68 5822If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5823the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5824__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5825section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5826orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5827representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5828character.
5829
252b5132
RH
5830@node Location Counter
5831@subsection The Location Counter
5832@kindex .
5833@cindex dot
5834@cindex location counter
5835@cindex current output location
5836The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5837current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5838location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5839within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5840anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5841
5842@cindex holes
5843Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5844moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5845location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5846and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5847doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5848
5849@smallexample
5850SECTIONS
5851@{
5852 output :
5853 @{
5854 file1(.text)
5855 . = . + 1000;
5856 file2(.text)
5857 . += 1000;
5858 file3(.text)
563e308f 5859 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5860@}
5861@end smallexample
5862@noindent
5863In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5864located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5865followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5866@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5867@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5868specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5869
5c6bbab8
NC
5870@cindex dot inside sections
5871Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5872current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5873statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5874absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5875however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5876not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5877
5878@smallexample
5879SECTIONS
5880@{
5881 . = 0x100
5882 .text: @{
5883 *(.text)
5884 . = 0x200
5885 @}
5886 . = 0x500
5887 .data: @{
5888 *(.data)
5889 . += 0x600
5890 @}
5891@}
5892@end smallexample
5893
5894The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5895and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5896the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5897much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5898move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5899and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5900the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5901the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5902
b5666f2f
AM
5903@cindex dot outside sections
5904Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5905output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5906needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5907
5908@smallexample
5909SECTIONS
5910@{
5911 start_of_text = . ;
5912 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5913 end_of_text = . ;
5914
5915 start_of_data = . ;
5916 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5917 end_of_data = . ;
5918@}
5919@end smallexample
5920
5921If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5922not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5923between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5924should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5925blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5926the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5927sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5928statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5929special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5930place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5931as follows:
5932
5933@smallexample
5934SECTIONS
5935@{
5936 start_of_text = . ;
5937 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5938 end_of_text = . ;
5939
5940 start_of_data = . ;
5941 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5942 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5943 end_of_data = . ;
5944@}
5945@end smallexample
5946
5947This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5948@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5949placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5950assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5951a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5952section. So you could write:
5953
5954@smallexample
5955SECTIONS
5956@{
5957 start_of_text = . ;
5958 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5959 end_of_text = . ;
5960
5961 . = . ;
5962 start_of_data = . ;
5963 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5964 end_of_data = . ;
5965@}
5966@end smallexample
5967
5968Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5969@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5970
252b5132
RH
5971@need 2000
5972@node Operators
5973@subsection Operators
5974@cindex operators for arithmetic
5975@cindex arithmetic operators
5976@cindex precedence in expressions
5977The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5978the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5979@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5980@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5981@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5982@smallexample
5983precedence associativity Operators Notes
5984(highest)
59851 left ! - ~ (1)
59862 left * / %
59873 left + -
59884 left >> <<
59895 left == != > < <= >=
59906 left &
59917 left |
59928 left &&
59939 left ||
599410 right ? :
599511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5996(lowest)
5997@end smallexample
5998Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5999(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6000(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6001@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6002@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6003@tex
6004\vskip \baselineskip
6005%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6006\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6007\hrule
6008\halign
6009{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6010height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6011&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6012height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6013\noalign{\hrule}
6014height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6015&highest&&&&&\cr
6016% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6017&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6018&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6019&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6020&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6021&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6022&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6023&7&&left&&|&\cr
6024&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6025&9&&left&&||&\cr
6026&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6027&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6028&lowest&&&&&\cr
6029height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6030\hrule}
6031@end tex
6032@iftex
6033{
6034@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6035@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6036@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6037}
6038@end iftex
6039@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6040
6041@node Evaluation
6042@subsection Evaluation
6043@cindex lazy evaluation
6044@cindex expression evaluation order
6045The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6046an expression when absolutely necessary.
6047
6048The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6049address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6050regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6051as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6052
6053However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6054until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6055other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6056for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6057
6058The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6059assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6060allocation.
6061
6062Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6063@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6064
6065If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6066available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6067following
6068@smallexample
6069@group
6070SECTIONS
6071 @{
a1ab1d2a 6072 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6073 @{ *(.text) @}
6074 @}
6075@end group
6076@end smallexample
6077@noindent
6078will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6079address}.
6080
6081@node Expression Section
6082@subsection The Section of an Expression
6083@cindex expression sections
6084@cindex absolute expressions
6085@cindex relative expressions
6086@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6087@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6088@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6089Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6090relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6091using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6092value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6093symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6094operations.
6095
abf4be64
AM
6096Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6097section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6098address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6099@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6100functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6101One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6102(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6103differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6104versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6105section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6106Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6107absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6108given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6109everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6110
6111In the following simple example,
252b5132 6112
7542af2a
AM
6113@smallexample
6114@group
6115SECTIONS
6116 @{
6117 . = 0x100;
6118 __executable_start = 0x100;
6119 .data :
6120 @{
6121 . = 0x10;
6122 __data_start = 0x10;
6123 *(.data)
6124 @}
6125 @dots{}
6126 @}
6127@end group
6128@end smallexample
252b5132 6129
7542af2a
AM
6130both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6131address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6132@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6133section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6134
5c3049d2
AM
6135For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6136addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6137
6138@itemize @bullet
6139@item
c05f749e
AM
6140Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6141operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6142absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6143@item
7542af2a
AM
6144Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6145relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6146and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6147@item
c05f749e
AM
6148Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6149in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6150address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6151before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6152@end itemize
6153
6154The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6155
6156@itemize @bullet
6157@item
6158An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6159@item
6160The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6161@item
9bc8bb33 6162The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6163relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6164(after above conversions) is also a number when
6165@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6166but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6167@item
6168The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6169relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6170section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6171@item
6172The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6173conversions) is an absolute address.
6174@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6175
6176You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6177to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6178create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6179section @samp{.data}:
6180@smallexample
6181SECTIONS
6182 @{
6183 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6184 @}
6185@end smallexample
6186@noindent
6187If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6188@samp{.data} section.
6189
7542af2a
AM
6190Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6191particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6192
252b5132
RH
6193@node Builtin Functions
6194@subsection Builtin Functions
6195@cindex functions in expressions
6196The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6197use in linker script expressions.
6198
6199@table @code
6200@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6201@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6202@cindex expression, absolute
6203Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6204of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6205value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6206normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6207
6208@item ADDR(@var{section})
6209@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6210@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6211Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6212script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6213the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6214@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6215@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6216the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6217@smallexample
6218@group
6219SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6220 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6221 @{
252b5132
RH
6222 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6223 @dots{}
6224 @}
6225 .output :
6226 @{
6227 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6228 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6229 @}
6230@dots{} @}
6231@end group
6232@end smallexample
6233
876f4090
NS
6234@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6235@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6236@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6237@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6238@cindex round up location counter
6239@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6240@cindex round up expression
6241@cindex align expression
6242Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6243to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6244doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6245arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6246expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6247equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6248
6249Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6250next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6251variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6252input sections:
252b5132
RH
6253@smallexample
6254@group
6255SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6256 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6257 *(.data)
6258 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6259 @}
6260@dots{} @}
6261@end group
6262@end smallexample
6263@noindent
6264The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6265a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6266a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6267of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6268
6269The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6270
362c1d1a
NS
6271@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6272@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6273@cindex section alignment
6274Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6275been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6276evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6277the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6278value in that section.
6279@smallexample
6280@group
6281SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6282 .output @{
6283 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6284 @dots{}
6285 @}
6286@dots{} @}
6287@end group
6288@end smallexample
6289
252b5132
RH
6290@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6291@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6292This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6293scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6294section.
6295
2d20f7bf
JJ
6296@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6297@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6298This is equivalent to either
6299@smallexample
6300(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6301@end smallexample
6302or
6303@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6304(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6305 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6306@end smallexample
6307@noindent
6308depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6309for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6310@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6311If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6312memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6313bytes in the on-disk file.
6314
6315This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6316any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6317@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6318be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6319working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6320
6321@noindent
6322Example:
6323@smallexample
6324 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6325@end smallexample
6326
6327@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6328@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6329This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6330evaluation purposes.
6331
6332@smallexample
6333 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6334@end smallexample
6335
a4f5ad88
JJ
6336@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6337@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6338This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6339@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6340When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6341does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6342@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6343boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6344it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6345@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6346padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6347section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6348
6349@smallexample
6350 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6351@end smallexample
6352
252b5132
RH
6353@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6354@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6355@cindex symbol defaults
6356Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6357defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6358return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6359default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6360shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6361the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6362existed, its value is preserved:
6363
6364@smallexample
6365@group
6366SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6367 .text : @{
6368 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6369 @dots{}
6370 @}
6371 @dots{}
6372@}
6373@end group
6374@end smallexample
6375
3ec57632
NC
6376@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6377@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6378Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6379
252b5132
RH
6380@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6381@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6382@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6383Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6384Section LMA}).
6385
2e53f7d6
NC
6386@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6387@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6388Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6389@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6390
252b5132
RH
6391@kindex MAX
6392@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6393Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6394
6395@kindex MIN
6396@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6397Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6398
6399@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6400@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6401@cindex unallocated address, next
6402Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6403This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6404use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6405output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6406
3ec57632
NC
6407@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6408@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6409Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6410
ba916c8a
MM
6411@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6412@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6413Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6414value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6415@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6416will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6417can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6418``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6419name.
6420
252b5132
RH
6421@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6422@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6423@cindex section size
6424Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6425been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6426evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6427@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6428@smallexample
6429@group
6430SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6431 .output @{
6432 .start = . ;
6433 @dots{}
6434 .end = . ;
6435 @}
6436 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6437 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6438@dots{} @}
6439@end group
6440@end smallexample
6441
6442@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6443@itemx sizeof_headers
6444@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6445@cindex header size
6446Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6447information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6448this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6449choose, to facilitate paging.
6450
6451@cindex not enough room for program headers
6452@cindex program headers, not enough room
6453When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6454@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6455number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6456addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6457additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6458room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6459the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6460script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6461you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6462command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6463@end table
6464
6465@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6466@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6467@cindex implicit linker scripts
6468If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6469an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6470linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6471linker will report an error.
6472
6473An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6474
6475Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6476assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6477commands.
6478
6479Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6480at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6481read. This can affect archive searching.
6482
6483@ifset GENERIC
6484@node Machine Dependent
6485@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6486
6487@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6488@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6489sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6490functionality are not listed.
6491
6492@menu
36f63dca
NC
6493@ifset H8300
6494* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6495@end ifset
6496@ifset I960
6497* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6498@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6499@ifset M68HC11
6500* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6501@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6502@ifset ARM
6503* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6504@end ifset
6505@ifset HPPA
6506* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6507@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6508@ifset M68K
6509* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6510@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6511@ifset MIPS
6512* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6513@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6514@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6515* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6516@end ifset
2469cfa2 6517@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6518* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6519@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6520@ifset NDS32
6521* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6522@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6523@ifset NIOSII
6524* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6525@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6526@ifset POWERPC
6527* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6528@end ifset
6529@ifset POWERPC64
6530* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6531@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6532@ifset SPU
6533* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6534@end ifset
74459f0e 6535@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6536* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6537@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6538@ifset WIN32
6539* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6540@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6541@ifset XTENSA
6542* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6543@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6544@end menu
6545@end ifset
6546
252b5132
RH
6547@ifset H8300
6548@ifclear GENERIC
6549@raisesections
6550@end ifclear
6551
6552@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6553@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6554
6555@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6556For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6557you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6558
6559@table @emph
6560@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6561@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6562@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6563targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6564program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6565respectively.
6566
6567@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6568@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6569@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6570@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6571sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6572page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6573(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6574@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6575top page of memory).
1502569c 6576
81f5558e
NC
6577@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6578indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6579displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6580the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6581@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6582whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6583range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6584
1502569c 6585@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6586@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6587biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6588which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6589page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6590(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6591@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6592the top page of memory).
6593
6594@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6595@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
659632 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6597changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6598(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6599@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6600the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6601@end table
6602
6603@ifclear GENERIC
6604@lowersections
6605@end ifclear
6606@end ifset
6607
36f63dca 6608@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6609@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6610@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6611@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6612@node Renesas
6613@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6614
c2dcd04e
NC
6615@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6616H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6617options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6618@end ifset
6619@end ifclear
6620
6621@ifset I960
6622@ifclear GENERIC
6623@raisesections
6624@end ifclear
6625
6626@node i960
6627@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6628
6629@cindex i960 support
6630
6631You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6632specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6633family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6634incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6635linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6636libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6637search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6638
6639For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6640well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6641paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6642the names
6643
6644@smallexample
6645@group
6646try
6647libtry.a
6648tryca
6649libtryca.a
6650@end group
6651@end smallexample
6652
6653@noindent
6654The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6655two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6656
6657You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6658the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6659use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6660specifies a library.
6661
6662@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6663@cindex relaxing on i960
6664@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6665you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6666@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6667them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6668instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6669instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6670target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6671not itself call any subroutines).
6672
6673@ifclear GENERIC
6674@lowersections
6675@end ifclear
6676@end ifset
6677
6678@ifset ARM
6679@ifclear GENERIC
6680@raisesections
6681@end ifclear
6682
93fd0973
SC
6683@ifset M68HC11
6684@ifclear GENERIC
6685@raisesections
6686@end ifclear
6687
6688@node M68HC11/68HC12
6689@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6690
6691@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6692
6693@subsection Linker Relaxation
6694
6695For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6696optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6697
6698@table @emph
6699@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6700@item relaxing address modes
6701@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6702targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6703program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6704respectively.
6705
6706@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6707transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6708page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6709
6710@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6711When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6712of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6713addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6714@code{bset} instructions.
6715
6716@end table
6717
6718@subsection Trampoline Generation
6719
6720@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6721@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6722For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6723call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6724will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6725trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6726case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6727point to the function trampoline.
6728
6729@ifclear GENERIC
6730@lowersections
6731@end ifclear
6732@end ifset
6733
36f63dca 6734@node ARM
3674e28a 6735@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6736
6737@cindex ARM interworking support
6738@kindex --support-old-code
6739For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6740between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6741been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6742line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6743libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6744option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6745given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6746which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6747the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6748non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6749
6750@cindex thumb entry point
6751@cindex entry point, thumb
6752@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6753The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6754@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6755But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6756branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6757executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6758
ce11ba6c
KT
6759@cindex PE import table prefixing
6760@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6761The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6762the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6763element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6764import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6765
e489d0ae
PB
6766@cindex BE8
6767@kindex --be8
6768The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6769executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6770objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6771option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6772little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6773
3674e28a
PB
6774@cindex TARGET1
6775@kindex --target1-rel
6776@kindex --target1-abs
6777The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6778@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6779or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6780and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6781
6782@cindex TARGET2
6783@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6784The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6785@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6786meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6787@table @samp
6788@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6789@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6790@item abs
6791@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6792@item got-rel
6793@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6794@end table
6795
319850b4
JB
6796@cindex FIX_V4BX
6797@kindex --fix-v4bx
6798The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6799specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6800interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6801also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6802
6803In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6804linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6805@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6806
6807In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6808relocations are ignored.
6809
845b51d6
PB
6810@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6811@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6812Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6813relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6814
6815@smallexample
6816TST rM, #1
6817MOVEQ PC, rM
6818BX Rn
6819@end smallexample
6820
6821This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6822and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6823condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6824
33bfe774
JB
6825@cindex USE_BLX
6826@kindex --use-blx
6827The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6828BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6829situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6830code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6831each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6832
6833This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6834specify it if you are using that target.
6835
c6dd86c6
JB
6836@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6837@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6838The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6839bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6840instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6841to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6842the support code can read the intended values.
6843
6844The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6845intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6846and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6847intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6848full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6849you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6850
6851If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6852enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6853@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6854mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6855vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6856@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6857
6858If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6859potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6860such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6861first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6862instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6863the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6864are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6865
2de70689
MGD
6866@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6867@kindex --fix-arm1176
6868@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6869The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6870in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6871are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6872unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6873
9d5777a3 6874Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6875Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6876http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6877
a504d23a
LA
6878@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6879@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6880
6881The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6882workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6883the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6884off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6885the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6886core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6887integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6888VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6889
6890The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6891necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6892
6893The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6894@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6895STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6896linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6897@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6898
6899If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6900potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6901such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6902replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6903branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6904then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6905
6906The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6907the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6908
6909The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6910they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6911there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6912occurs.
6913
6914The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6915PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6916large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6917cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6918occurs.
6919
bf21ed78
MS
6920@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6921@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6922The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6923warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6924enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6925linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6926using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6927not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6928
6929@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6930@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6931The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6932warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6933@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6934linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6935using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6936
726150b7
NC
6937@cindex PIC_VENEER
6938@kindex --pic-veneer
6939The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6940ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6941is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6942@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6943
6944@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6945@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6946The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6947code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6948perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6949placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6950controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6951The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6952duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6953group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6954code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6955where they should be placed.
6956
6957The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6958@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6959placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6960branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6961placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6962value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6963exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6964A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6965linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6966from the input sections.
6967
6968The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6969@samp{N = +1}.
6970
1a51c1a4
NC
6971Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6972only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6973otherwise.
6974
1db37fe6
YG
6975@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6976@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6977@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6978The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6979
6980The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6981
68fcca92
JW
6982@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6983@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6984@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6985The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6986
6987Please contact ARM for further details.
6988
1db37fe6
YG
6989@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6990@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6991@cindex Merging exidx entries
6992The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6993
6994@kindex --long-plt
6995@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6996The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6997which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6998entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6999
1f56df9d
JW
7000@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7001@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7002The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7003link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7004
4ba2ef8f
TP
7005@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7006All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7007Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7008@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7009veneers in memory.
7010
54ddd295
TP
7011@kindex --cmse-implib
7012@cindex Secure gateway import library
7013The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7014specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7015secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7016executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7017
0955507f
TP
7018@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7019@cindex Input import library
7020The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7021must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7022given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7023in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7024@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7025library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7026library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7027for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7028specified.
7029
36f63dca
NC
7030@ifclear GENERIC
7031@lowersections
7032@end ifclear
7033@end ifset
7034
7035@ifset HPPA
7036@ifclear GENERIC
7037@raisesections
7038@end ifclear
7039
7040@node HPPA ELF32
7041@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7042@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7043@kindex --multi-subspace
7044When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7045import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7046The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7047stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7048multiple sub-spaces.
7049
7050@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7051@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7052Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7053stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7054@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7055sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7056a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7057the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7058conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7059prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7060A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7061branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7062@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7063@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7064detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7065positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7066
7067Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7068single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7069create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7070large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7071
7072@ifclear GENERIC
7073@lowersections
7074@end ifclear
7075@end ifset
7076
7fb9f789
NC
7077@ifset M68K
7078@ifclear GENERIC
7079@raisesections
7080@end ifclear
7081
7082@node M68K
7083@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7084
7085@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7086@kindex --got=@var{type}
7087The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7088The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7089@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7090the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7091@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7092entries only at non-negative offsets.
7093@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7094entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7095support such GOTs.
7096@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7097output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7098file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7099files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7100
7101@ifclear GENERIC
7102@lowersections
7103@end ifclear
7104@end ifset
7105
833794fc
MR
7106@ifset MIPS
7107@ifclear GENERIC
7108@raisesections
7109@end ifclear
7110
7111@node MIPS
7112@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7113
7114@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7115@kindex --insn32
7116@kindex --no-insn32
7117The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7118microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7119in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7120used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7121or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7122including 16-bit ones where possible.
7123
8b10b0b3
MR
7124@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7125@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7126@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7127The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7128control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7129@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7130relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7131calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7132relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7133instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7134or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7135the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7136
833794fc
MR
7137@ifclear GENERIC
7138@lowersections
7139@end ifclear
7140@end ifset
7141
36f63dca
NC
7142@ifset MMIX
7143@ifclear GENERIC
7144@raisesections
7145@end ifclear
7146
7147@node MMIX
7148@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7149For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7150@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7151understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7152can translate between the two formats.
7153
7154There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7155Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7156registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7157equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7158@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7159global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7160this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7161symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7162
7a2de473
HPN
7163Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7164@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7165The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7166of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7167
7168Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7169are left out from an mmo file.
7170
7171@ifclear GENERIC
7172@lowersections
7173@end ifclear
7174@end ifset
7175
7176@ifset MSP430
7177@ifclear GENERIC
7178@raisesections
7179@end ifclear
7180
7181@node MSP430
7182@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7183For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7184will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7185just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7186
7187@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7188The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7189
7190@table @code
7191@item @samp{.vectors}
7192Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7193
7194@item @samp{.bootloader}
7195Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7196in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7197
7198@item @samp{.infomem}
7199Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7200this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7201
c0065db7 7202@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7203This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7204in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7205
7206@item @samp{.noinit}
7207Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7208
c0065db7 7209The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7210@end table
7211
7212@ifclear GENERIC
7213@lowersections
7214@end ifclear
7215@end ifset
7216
35c08157
KLC
7217@ifset NDS32
7218@ifclear GENERIC
7219@raisesections
7220@end ifclear
7221
7222@node NDS32
7223@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7224@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7225For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7226relaxes objects according to these options.
7227
7228@table @code
7229@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7230Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7231
7232@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7233Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7234
7235@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7236Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7237
7238@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7239Export the EX9 table after linking.
7240
7241@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7242Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7243
7244@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7245Update the existing EX9 table.
7246
7247@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7248Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7249
7250@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7251Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7252
7253@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7254Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7255
7256@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7257Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7258@end table
7259
7260@ifclear GENERIC
7261@lowersections
7262@end ifclear
7263@end ifset
7264
78058a5e
SL
7265@ifset NIOSII
7266@ifclear GENERIC
7267@raisesections
7268@end ifclear
7269
7270@node Nios II
7271@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7272@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7273@kindex --relax on Nios II
7274
7275Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7276transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7277which may result in @command{ld} giving
7278@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7279The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7280trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7281outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7282trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7283be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7284larger than 256MB.
7285
7286The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7287is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7288@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7289locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7290source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7291register as a temporary.
7292
7293Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7294relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7295option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7296
7297@ifclear GENERIC
7298@lowersections
7299@end ifclear
7300@end ifset
7301
2a60a7a8
AM
7302@ifset POWERPC
7303@ifclear GENERIC
7304@raisesections
7305@end ifclear
7306
7307@node PowerPC ELF32
7308@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7309@cindex PowerPC long branches
7310@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7311Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7312displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7313@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7314@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7315the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7316section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7317section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7318@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7319both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7320considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7321
7322@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7323@table @option
7324@cindex PowerPC PLT
7325@kindex --bss-plt
7326@item --bss-plt
7327Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7328generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7329the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7330writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7331@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7332PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7333compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7334BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7335
016687f8
AM
7336@kindex --secure-plt
7337@item --secure-plt
7338@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7339@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7340when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7341layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7342style BSS PLT.
7343
2a60a7a8
AM
7344@cindex PowerPC GOT
7345@kindex --sdata-got
7346@item --sdata-got
7347The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7348sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7349@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7350section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7351@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7352@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7353@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7354@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7355PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7356pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7357GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7358really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7359
7360@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7361@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7362@item --emit-stub-syms
7363This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7364symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7365
7366@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7367@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7368@item --no-tls-optimize
7369PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7370sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7371disable the optimization.
7372@end table
7373
7374@ifclear GENERIC
7375@lowersections
7376@end ifclear
7377@end ifset
7378
7379@ifset POWERPC64
7380@ifclear GENERIC
7381@raisesections
7382@end ifclear
7383
7384@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7385@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7386
7387@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7388@table @option
7389@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7390@kindex --stub-group-size
7391@item --stub-group-size
7392Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7393by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7394@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7395sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7396a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7397the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7398conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7399prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7400A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7401branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7402@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7403@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7404detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7405positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7406
7407Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7408single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7409create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7410large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7411
7412@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7413@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7414@item --emit-stub-syms
7415This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7416symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7417
7418@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7419@kindex --dotsyms
7420@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7421@item --dotsyms
7422@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7423These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7424in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7425function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7426code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7427properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7428to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7429@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7430dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7431feature.
7432
7ae4ea7d
AM
7433@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7434@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7435@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7436@item --save-restore-funcs
7437@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7438These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7439provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7440@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7441function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7442link.
7443
2a60a7a8
AM
7444@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7445@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7446@item --no-tls-optimize
7447PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7448sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7449disable the optimization.
7450
7c9cf415
AM
7451@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7452@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7453@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7454@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7455@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7456These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7457stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7458an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7459@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7460stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7461option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7462Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7463slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7464application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7465normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7466
2a60a7a8
AM
7467@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7468@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7469@item --no-opd-optimize
7470PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7471corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7472the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7473Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7474
7475@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7476@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7477@item --non-overlapping-opd
7478Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7479@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7480the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7481entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7482
7483@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7484@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7485@item --no-toc-optimize
7486PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7487entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7488reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7489marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7490marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7491relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7492unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7493reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7494discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7495reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7496code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7497optimization.
7498
7499@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7500@kindex --no-multi-toc
7501@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7502If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7503@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7504where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7505entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7506total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7507grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7508TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7509calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7510help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
751164K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7512Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7513
7514@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7515@kindex --no-toc-sort
7516@item --no-toc-sort
7517By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7518happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7519placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7520with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7521referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7522@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7523results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7524off this feature.
7525
7526@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7527@kindex --plt-align
7528@kindex --no-plt-align
7529@item --plt-align
7530@itemx --no-plt-align
7531Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7532padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7533specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7534that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7535stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7536
7537@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7538@kindex --plt-static-chain
7539@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7540@item --plt-static-chain
7541@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7542Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7543chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7544chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7545
7546@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7547@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7548@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7549@item --plt-thread-safe
7550@itemx --no-thread-safe
7551With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7552lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7553another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7554order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7555memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7556barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7557looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7558seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7559default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7560@end table
7561
7562@ifclear GENERIC
7563@lowersections
7564@end ifclear
7565@end ifset
7566
49fa1e15
AM
7567@ifset SPU
7568@ifclear GENERIC
7569@raisesections
7570@end ifclear
7571
7572@node SPU ELF
7573@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7574
7575@cindex SPU ELF options
7576@table @option
7577
7578@cindex SPU plugins
7579@kindex --plugin
7580@item --plugin
7581This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7582
7583@cindex SPU overlays
7584@kindex --no-overlays
7585@item --no-overlays
7586Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7587regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7588@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7589turns off all this special overlay handling.
7590
7591@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7592@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7593@item --emit-stub-syms
7594This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7595symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7596
7597@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7598@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7599@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7600This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7601function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7602on calls to non-overlay regions.
7603
7604@cindex SPU local store size
7605@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7606@item --local-store=lo:hi
7607@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7608the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7609range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7610
c0065db7 7611@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7612@kindex --stack-analysis
7613@item --stack-analysis
7614SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7615unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7616under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7617@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7618@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7619determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7620for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7621for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7622for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7623find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7624and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7625under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7626dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7627is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7628and calls will be given.
7629
c0065db7 7630@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7631@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7632@item --emit-stack-syms
7633This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7634in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7635These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7636functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7637functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7638such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7639The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7640@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7641@end table
7642
7643@ifclear GENERIC
7644@lowersections
7645@end ifclear
7646@end ifset
7647
36f63dca
NC
7648@ifset TICOFF
7649@ifclear GENERIC
7650@raisesections
7651@end ifclear
7652
7653@node TI COFF
7654@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7655@cindex TI COFF versions
7656@kindex --format=@var{version}
7657The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7658TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7659also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7660format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7661header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7662
7663@ifclear GENERIC
7664@lowersections
7665@end ifclear
7666@end ifset
7667
2ca22b03
NC
7668@ifset WIN32
7669@ifclear GENERIC
7670@raisesections
7671@end ifclear
7672
7673@node WIN32
7674@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7675
c0065db7 7676This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7677See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7678command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7679
7680@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7681@cindex import libraries
7682@item import libraries
69da35b5 7683The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7684libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7685regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7686archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7687support for creating such libraries provided with the
7688@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7689
c0065db7
RM
7690@item exporting DLL symbols
7691@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7692The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7693
7694@table @emph
7695@item using auto-export functionality
7696@cindex using auto-export functionality
7697By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7698which is controlled by the following command line options:
7699
0a5d968e
NC
7700@itemize
7701@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7702@item --exclude-symbols
7703@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7704@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7705@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7706@end itemize
7707
09e2aba4
DK
7708When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7709(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7710symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7711often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7712private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7713options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7714exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7715final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7716
7717If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7718command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7719if either of the following are true:
7720
7721@itemize
7722@item A DEF file is used.
7723@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7724@end itemize
dc8465bf 7725
c0065db7
RM
7726@item using a DEF file
7727@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7728Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7729an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7730exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7731name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7732command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7733
7734@example
7735gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7736@end example
7737
0a5d968e
NC
7738Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7739@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7740
dc8465bf
NC
7741Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7742
7743@example
4b5bd4e7 7744LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7745
7746EXPORTS
7747foo
7748bar
7749_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7750another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7751var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7752doo = foo == foo2
7753eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7754@end example
dc8465bf 7755
7fcab871 7756This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7757symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7758alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7759by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7760@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7761@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7762export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7763in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7764symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7765
6b31ad16
DS
7766The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7767name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7768the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7769
b45619c0
NC
7770When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7771library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7772@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7773executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7774
7775With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7776specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7777non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7778
7779If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7780or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7781filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7782
4b5bd4e7
DS
7783The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7784
7785@example
7786EXPORTS
7787 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7788 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7789 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7790@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7791
7792Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7793@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7794@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7795@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7796Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7797@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7798string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7799
7800The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7801
7802@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7803will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7804by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7805linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7806library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7807
7808@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7809The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7810the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7811@code{*_imp__foo}).
7812
7813@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7814well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7815read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7816variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7817the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7818extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7819application will behave unexpectedly.
7820
7821@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7822it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7823symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7824API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7825the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7826
4b5bd4e7
DS
7827See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7828other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7829
7830@cindex creating a DEF file
7831While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7832with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7833
7834@item Using decorations
7835@cindex Using decorations
7836Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7837itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7838declared as:
7839
7840@example
7841__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7842__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7843@end example
7844
7845All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7846any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7847this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7848the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7849
7850Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7851decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7852instead:
7853
7854@example
7855__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7856__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7857@end example
7858
c0065db7
RM
7859This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7860when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7861variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7862code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7863of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7864omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7865@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7866information.
c0065db7 7867@end table
dc8465bf 7868
2ca22b03
NC
7869@cindex automatic data imports
7870@item automatic data imports
7871The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7872by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7873compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7874issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7875code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7876c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7877initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7878decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7879platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7880command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7881The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7882suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7883trigger the feature's use.
7884
c0065db7 7885auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7886additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7887
c0065db7 7888"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7889documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7890
c0065db7
RM
7891The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7892occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7893One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7894below.
7895
7896@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7897For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7898object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7899offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7900field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7901in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7902without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7903The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7904references.
7905
c0065db7
RM
7906The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7907be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7908themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7909runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7910compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7911support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7912run without error on an older system.
7913
c0065db7
RM
7914@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7915enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7916
7917@cindex direct linking to a dll
7918@item direct linking to a dll
7919The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7920including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7921libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7922traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7923libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7924function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7925though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7926storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7927tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7928large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7929
c0065db7 7930Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7931@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7932of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7933perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7934select the dll instead of an import library.
7935
2ca22b03 7936
69da35b5
NC
7937For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7938to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7939
7940@example
45e948fe
NC
7941libxxx.dll.a
7942xxx.dll.a
7943libxxx.a
7944xxx.lib
69da35b5 7945cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7946libxxx.dll
7947xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7948@end example
7949
69da35b5
NC
7950before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7951
c0065db7
RM
7952(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7953where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7954@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7955file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7956@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7957
c0065db7
RM
7958Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7959@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7960was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7961various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7962could coexist on the same machine.
7963
2ca22b03
NC
7964The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7965applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7966libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7967
7968@example
7969bin/
7970 cygxxx.dll
7971lib/
7972 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7973 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7974@end example
7975
c0065db7
RM
7976Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7977done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7978
79791. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7980@example
7981gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7982@end example
2ca22b03 7983
69da35b5
NC
7984However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7985(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7986@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7987not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7988
2ca22b03
NC
79892. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7990directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7991should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7992making the app/dll.
7993
7994@example
7995ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7996@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7997
7998Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7999
8000@example
8001gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8002@end example
69da35b5
NC
8003
8004This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8005perfectly legal
8006
8007@example
8008bin/
8009 cygxxx-5.dll
8010lib/
c0065db7 8011 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8012@end example
8013
dc8465bf 8014Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8015even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8016@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8017
8018Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8019wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8020
80211. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8022work with auto-imported data.
8023
dc8465bf
NC
80242. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8025import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8026symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8027for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8028possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8029
45e948fe
NC
80303. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8031critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8032in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8033stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8034
69da35b5 8035So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8036true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8037a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8038binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8039massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8040requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8041will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8042
c0065db7 8043@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8044@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8045@item adding additional names
8046Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8047A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8048exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8049when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8050import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8051
c0065db7 8052@example
dc8465bf
NC
8053LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8054
8055EXPORTS
c0065db7 8056foo
dc8465bf 8057_foo = foo
c0065db7 8058@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8059
8060The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8061
8062Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8063source code using the "weak" attribute:
8064
c0065db7
RM
8065@example
8066void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8067void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8068@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8069
8070See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8071symbols.
8072
8073@item renaming symbols
8074Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8075kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8076@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8077DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8078created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8079
c0065db7 8080@example
dc8465bf
NC
8081LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8082
8083EXPORTS
8084_foo = foo
c0065db7 8085@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8086
8087The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8088@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8089@end table
dc8465bf 8090
0a5d968e 8091Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8092unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8093If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8094@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8095that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8096@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8097renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8098to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8099the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8100In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8101which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8102
8103@cindex weak externals
8104@item weak externals
8105The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8106weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8107defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8108are three variants of weak externals:
8109@itemize
8110@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8111called lazy externals.
8112@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8113This form is not presently implemented.
8114@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8115implemented.
8116@end itemize
8117As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8118are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8119uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8120
8121@cindex aligned common symbols
8122@item aligned common symbols
8123As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8124desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8125the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8126carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8127by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8128tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8129but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8130warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8131
2ca22b03
NC
8132@end table
8133
8134@ifclear GENERIC
8135@lowersections
8136@end ifclear
8137@end ifset
8138
e0001a05
NC
8139@ifset XTENSA
8140@ifclear GENERIC
8141@raisesections
8142@end ifclear
8143
8144@node Xtensa
8145@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8146
8147@cindex Xtensa processors
8148The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8149@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8150specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8151keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8152example, with the command:
8153
8154@smallexample
8155SECTIONS
8156@{
8157 .text : @{
8158 *(.literal .text)
8159 @}
8160@}
8161@end smallexample
8162
8163@noindent
8164@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8165and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8166literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8167interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8168group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8169files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8170and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8171
43cd72b9 8172@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8173@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8174Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8175provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8176is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8177literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8178will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8179location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8180the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8181unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8182@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8183range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8184
8185For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8186to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8187instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8188instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8189instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8190@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8191hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8192By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8193switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8194density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8195instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8196performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8197linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8198a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8199
8200The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8201control the linker:
8202
8203@cindex Xtensa options
8204@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8205@item --size-opt
8206When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8207more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8208no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8209alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8210preserve the correctness of the code.
8211@end table
e0001a05
NC
8212
8213@ifclear GENERIC
8214@lowersections
8215@end ifclear
8216@end ifset
8217
252b5132
RH
8218@ifclear SingleFormat
8219@node BFD
8220@chapter BFD
8221
8222@cindex back end
8223@cindex object file management
8224@cindex object formats available
8225@kindex objdump -i
8226The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8227These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8228object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8229format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8230it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8231associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8232object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8233(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8234list all the formats available for your configuration.
8235
8236@cindex BFD requirements
8237@cindex requirements for BFD
8238As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8239several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8240BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8241formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8242been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8243BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8244may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8245
8246One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8247mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8248useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8249conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8250
8251@menu
8252* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8253@end menu
8254
8255@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8256@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8257@cindex opening object files
8258@include bfdsumm.texi
8259@end ifclear
8260
8261@node Reporting Bugs
8262@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8263@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8264@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8265
ff5dcc92 8266Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8267
8268Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8269it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8270to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8271work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8272@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8273
8274In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8275information that enables us to fix the bug.
8276
8277@menu
8278* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8279* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8280@end menu
8281
8282@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8283@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8284@cindex bug criteria
8285
8286If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8287
8288@itemize @bullet
8289@cindex fatal signal
8290@cindex linker crash
8291@cindex crash of linker
8292@item
8293If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8294@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8295
8296@cindex error on valid input
8297@item
ff5dcc92 8298If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8299
8300@cindex invalid input
8301@item
ff5dcc92 8302If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8303may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8304object files are correct.
8305
8306@item
8307If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8308improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8309@end itemize
8310
8311@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8312@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8313@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8314@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8315
8316A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8317products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8318recommend you contact that organization first.
8319
8320You can find contact information for many support companies and
8321individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8322distribution.
8323
ad22bfe8 8324@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8325Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8326@value{BUGURL}.
8327@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8328
8329The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8330@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8331fact or leave it out, state it!
8332
8333Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8334problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8335assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8336matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8337the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8338location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8339were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8340into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8341specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8342and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8343
8344Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8345the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8346on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8347
8348Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8349bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8350respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8351You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8352
8353To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8354
8355@itemize @bullet
8356@item
ff5dcc92 8357The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8358the @samp{--version} argument.
8359
8360Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8361the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8362
8363@item
ff5dcc92 8364Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8365patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8366
8367@item
8368The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8369version number.
8370
8371@item
ff5dcc92 8372What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8373``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8374
8375@item
8376The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8377observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8378list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8379sufficient.
8380
8381If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8382and then we might not encounter the bug.
8383
8384@item
8385A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8386bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8387provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8388bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8389state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8390requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8391we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8392attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8393
8394If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8395@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8396object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8397@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8398how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8399
8400@item
8401A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8402incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8403
ff5dcc92 8404Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8405will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8406not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8407a chance to make a mistake.
8408
8409Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8410say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8411copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8412C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8413and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8414fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8415you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8416any conclusion from our observations.
8417
8418@item
ff5dcc92 8419If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8420diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8421@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8422If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8423context, not by line number.
8424
8425The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8426sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8427@end itemize
8428
8429Here are some things that are not necessary:
8430
8431@itemize @bullet
8432@item
8433A description of the envelope of the bug.
8434
8435Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8436which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8437changes will not affect it.
8438
8439This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8440will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8441with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8442We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8443
8444Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8445of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8446output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8447less time, and so on.
8448
8449However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8450report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8451
8452@item
8453A patch for the bug.
8454
8455A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8456the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8457a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8458to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8459
ff5dcc92 8460Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8461construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8462through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8463able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8464fixed.
8465
8466And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8467patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8468help us to understand.
8469
8470@item
8471A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8472
8473Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8474things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8475@end itemize
8476
8477@node MRI
8478@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8479@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8480To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8481linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8482alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8483described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8484simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8485@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8486linker commands; these commands are described here.
8487
8488In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8489file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8490features to make use of them.
8491
8492You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8493@samp{-c} command-line option.
8494
8495Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8496command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8497blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8498MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8499issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8500
8501Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8502
8503You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8504lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8505The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8506
8507@table @code
8508@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8509@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8510@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8511Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8512the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8513@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8514your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8515script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8516commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8517input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8518@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8519
8520@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8521@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8522Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8523in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8524
8525@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8526
8527@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8528@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8529Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8530@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8531
8532@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8533@item BASE @var{expression}
8534Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8535absolute addresses) in the output file.
8536
8537@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8538@item CHIP @var{expression}
8539@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8540This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8541
8542@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8543@item END
8544This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8545
8546@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8547@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8548Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8549language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8550
8551@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8552@item
252b5132
RH
8553S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8554
8555@item
8556IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8557
8558@item
8559COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8560@samp{COFF}
8561@end enumerate
8562
8563@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8564@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8565Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8566@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8567
8568The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8569same line, with no change in its effect.
8570
8571@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8572@item LOAD @var{filename}
8573@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8574Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8575same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8576command line.
8577
8578@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8579@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8580@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8581MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8582option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8583
8584@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8585@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8586@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8587Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8588order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8589script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8590sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8591file, in the order specified.
8592
8593@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8594@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8595@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8596@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8597Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8598@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8599
8600@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8601@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8602@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8603@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8604You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8605specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8606If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8607@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8608@end table
8609
793c5807
NC
8610@node GNU Free Documentation License
8611@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8612@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8613
370b66a1
CD
8614@node LD Index
8615@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8616
8617@printindex cp
8618
8619@tex
7ca01ed9 8620% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8621% meantime:
8622\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8623\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8624\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8625\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8626\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8627\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8628\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8629\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8630\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8631% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8632@end tex
8633
252b5132 8634@bye
This page took 1.613271 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.